JP2019129859A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably stopping an operation of a movable body for performance.SOLUTION: A first movable body determines that, if contact to the first movable body is detected, abnormality has occurred, and a second movable body determines that, abnormality has occurred, if a rotary operation is not detected. The first movable body 99 stops an operation at a time point when occurrence of abnormality is detected once, and the second movable body stops an operation at a time point when occurrence of abnormality is detected twice. By different determination methods for determining abnormality, according to kinds of movable bodies, abnormality determination according to a shape or operation of the movable body can be performed, and control for stopping an operation preferably, is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine that stops a moving movable body when the contact of a human body is detected during the operation of the moving movable body (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-99627 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, stop control according to the type of the movable body for production has not been considered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably stopping the operation of the production movable body.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A first effect movable body (for example, a first movable body 99AK001L, a first movable body 99AK001R) provided so that a player can come into contact therewith,
A second effect movable body (for example, a second movable body 99AK002) provided so that a player can contact;
Motion control means for controlling the operations of the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the drive unit 99AK011, the drive unit 99AK021),
The operation control means includes
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the first effect movable body (for example, the process of step 99AKS004 can be executed)
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the second effect movable body (for example, the process of step 99AKS017 can be executed)
The first effect movable body and the second effect movable body are stopped under different conditions (different determinations are executed in step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The first effect movable body is operable to change the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the first movable body 99AK001 projects outwardly as shown in FIG. 8-10).
The second effect movable body may be operable without changing the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the second movable body 99AK002 rotates).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
An abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The operation control means includes
Based on the determination result by the abnormality determination means, it is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the first effect movable body (for example, the process of step 99AKS004 can be executed)
Based on the determination result by the abnormality determination means, it is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the second effect movable body (for example, the process of step 99AKS017 can be executed)
The second effect movable body is controlled to be longer than the first effect movable body until the operation is stopped after it is determined that there is an abnormality (for example, contact is detected in step 99AKS003). If it is, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 may be stopped immediately, and the operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped when the second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
An abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The operation control means includes
The first effect movable body stops the operation when it is determined that there is an abnormality for the first number of times (for example, when the contact is detected once in step 99AKS003, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 is stopped),
The second effect movable body stops operation when it is determined that there is an abnormality for a second number of times greater than the first number of times (for example, when a second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015). The operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
An abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The abnormality determination means determines that the first effect movable body is abnormal when the first condition is satisfied (for example, in step 99AKS003, the abnormality is determined when contact is detected by the touch sensor 99AK014). ), It is determined that there is an abnormality in the second effect movable body when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (for example, in step 99AKS013, when the rotation operation is not detected by the rotation detector 99AK023, the operation abnormality is detected). May be determined).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
An abnormality determining means capable of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013, 99AKS015);
Detecting means for detecting a player's contact (for example, touch sensor 99AK014),
The abnormality determining means determines the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body based on the detection result by the detecting means (for example, in step 99AKS003, it is abnormal when contact is detected by the touch sensor 99AK014). (Determine).
According to such a structure, the movable body for production can be operated safely.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
The first effect movable body and the second effect movable body are operable between an origin position and a post-operation position, respectively.
The operation control means includes
After executing the control to stop the operation during the operation with the first effect movable body, it is possible to execute the control to move the first effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period of time (for example, If it is determined in step 99AKS007 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS008 is executed).
After executing the control to stop the operation during the operation with the second effect movable body, it is possible to execute the control to move the second effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period of time (for example, If it is determined in step 99AKS021 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS022 may be executed).
According to such a structure, the fall of the interest of a game can be prevented.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be operated in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014), and the like.
A movable control means (for example, step) capable of executing at least control of return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member. A production control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012, and the like.
The movable control means may perform control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS007) when the change is permitted.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

(9) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (8),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be operated in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014), and the like.
At least movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012) capable of executing a return operation control for returning the movable member to the origin position;
The movable control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the return operation may not be performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
According to such a configuration, when the change is permitted, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a characteristic portion 98AK. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the characteristic part 98AK. It is a figure which shows the air volume set with respect to the sound volume which concerns on characteristic part 98AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output amount setting process which concerns on characteristic part 98AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement which concerns on characteristic part 98AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement which concerns on characteristic part 98AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement which concerns on characteristic part 98AK. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on characteristic part 99AK. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the characteristic part 99AK. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the 1st movable body which concerns on characteristic part 99AK. It is a figure which shows the function structure of the movable body which concerns on characteristic part 99AK. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement timing and operation | movement content of the movable body which concern on characteristic part 99AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable body abnormality determination process which concerns on characteristic part 99AK. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which concern on another characteristic part. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production control command which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value used as the game random number which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit classification determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot classification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | positioning and display content of the display monitor which concern on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the storage area which memorize | stores the number of prize balls concerning another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the memory map which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the built-in RAM area which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the example of a display control in the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the buffer update which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a back perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a back perspective view which shows the state which open | released the frame for game machines in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the example of state control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command process at the time of power-on which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the priority of presentation control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation process in progress in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the output amount changeover switch which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the initial setting control which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the alerting | reporting which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the time of start concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output change process in progress which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of presentation control in the modification which concerns on characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of initial operation which concerns on characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on command process which concerns on characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command process at the time of power-on in the modification concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on command process which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the setting confirmation alerting | reporting screen which concerns on characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production | presentation control pattern which concerns on characteristic part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process which concerns on characteristic part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control process which concerns on characteristic part 74AK. FIG. 38 is a timing diagram illustrating a control example of confirmation effects relating to the characteristic portion 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on command process which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change which concerns on characteristic part 75AK. FIG. 38 is a timing diagram illustrating a control example of confirmation effects relating to the characteristic portion 75AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 98AK)
Next, the characteristic part 98AK of this Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 8A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic portion 98AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 98AK is provided with a first blower port 98AK001 at the lower position of the gaming machine frame 3 (the back side portion of the stick controller 31A) and the second blowing at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. A mouth 98AK002 is provided. From the first air vent 98AK001 and the second air vent 98AK002, wind can be output toward the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 98AK has a first blower 98AK011 for outputting wind from the first blower port 98AK001 and a wind for outputting wind from the second blower port 98AK002. A second blower 98AK012 is provided. The first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012 are connected to the effect control board 12, and perform air blowing with a predetermined air volume based on a control signal from the effect control board 12.

  The first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012 are each configured by a motor, a fan, and the like, and can generate a predetermined amount of wind according to a control signal from the effect control board 12. The wind generated by the first blower 98AK011 is output from the first blower port 98AK001, and the wind generated by the second blower 98AK012 is output from the second blower port 98AK002. The first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012 are not limited to those configured by a motor, a fan, or the like, and at least one of them may be blown using a pump or compressed air (cylinder). A wind may be generated with sound or vibration. For example, wind (vibration) may be generated when sound is output from a bass reflex speaker or a woofer.

  In this embodiment, wind is output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and / or the second air outlet 98AK002 in a predetermined case such as during execution of a specific effect such as a reach effect. In this embodiment, the volume output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set in four stages by the player performing a predetermined operation. The air volume output from the second air outlet 98AK002 is variable, and four levels of air volume are provided as shown in FIG. 8-3. The second blower 98AK012 changes the amount of wind output from the second blower port 98AK002 by changing the rotation amount of the motor (fan).

  In this embodiment, as an example, as shown in FIG. 8C, the air volume output from the second air outlet 98AK002 is set to an air volume inversely proportional to the set volume. That is, the larger the volume output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the smaller the volume of wind output, and the smaller the volume output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the larger the volume of wind output. ing. By doing in this way, while being able to complement a sound with a wind, a wind can be complemented with a voice and each output amount can be balanced. Note that the number of levels of the volume and the air volume is not limited to four, but may be three or less or five or more. Also, the air volume (correspondence between volume and air volume) set according to the sound volume is not limited to the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the output amount setting process executed by the effect control CPU 120. The output amount setting process is a process for monitoring the presence / absence of a volume change operation by the player and setting the volume corresponding to the operation content and setting the volume corresponding to the volume when the volume change operation is performed. . The output amount setting process may be executed for each timer interrupt, for example, in the effect control process process (after step S161, etc.). That is, the output amount setting process may be executed so that the presence / absence of a volume setting operation by the player can be constantly monitored.

  In the output amount setting process shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a volume change operation has been performed (step 98AKS001). The volume changing operation may be an arbitrary operation. For example, the volume may be increased or decreased by operating the stick controller 31 </ b> A to the left or right except during the production using the stick controller 31 </ b> A. Further, by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the menu volume may be called to set the volume. If the volume change operation has not been performed (step 98AKS001; No), the output amount setting process is terminated.

  When the volume changing operation is performed (step 98AKS001; Yes), the changed volume is set (step 98AKS002). In step 98AKS002, the changed volume may be stored (set) in a volume storage area for storing the currently set volume provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. When sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound volume storage area is referred to and control is performed so that sound is output at the set sound volume.

  Subsequently, the air volume corresponding to the changed volume is set (step 98AKS003). In step 98AKS003, for example, the air volume corresponding to the changed sound volume may be stored (set) in the air volume storage area for storing the currently set air volume provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. When the wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002, the air volume storage area is referred to and control is performed so that the wind is output with the set air volume.

  Thereafter, in order to allow the player to check the changed volume, a predetermined change confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the changed volume (step 98AKS004). At the same time, in order to allow the player to check the changed air volume, the wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002 with the changed air volume (step 98AKS005). Then, the output amount setting process ends. In step 98AKS005, wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 with the changed air volume.

  Note that the output of the change confirmation sound may be omitted when other sound (effect sound or the like) is output, or may be output superimposed on another sound.

(Example of production operation of feature 98AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the feature unit 98AK will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 8-5 is an example of an effect operation when a reach effect of super reach is executed and a big hit is achieved. FIG. 8-5 (A) shows that the decorative symbols indicating the numeral 7 in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 are stopped and reach a state. ing.

  Thereafter, when developing to super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), an image indicating super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative design is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left part. . At this time, the sound “super reach” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the wind is output from the second air blowing port 98AK002 toward the player. It is notified that it became super reach by such an effect. At this time, the output of the sound and the output of the wind may not be simultaneous. For example, the wind may be output after a predetermined time, for example, 1 second after the sound is output. In this way, since the wind is output after it is notified that the super reach has been made by voice, an unexpected effect can be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 8-5, the volume and the air volume are not shown. However, in the reach production of the super reach shown in FIG. 8-5, for example, the air volume corresponding to the set volume (the air volume 1 when the set volume 1 is set, The wind may be output with the air volume 4 or the like when the set sound volume is 4.

  Thereafter, a reach effect of super reach (for example, a battle effect in which the characters confront each other) is executed, and when the timing for deriving and displaying the variable display result approaches, as shown in FIG. 8C, the stick controller 31A is imitated. The effect image 98AK031 and the word “game!” Indicating that the battle effect is settled are displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (D), the effect image 98AK031U imitating the stick controller 31A. Is enlarged, and the characters “Close!” Are displayed on the image display device 5 and the sound “Close” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A is executed.

  Here, when an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (E), a decorative image indicating the numeral 7 is prepared and a character image indicating that the battle effect is won is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, wind is output from the first air outlet 98AK001 toward the player. Since the first air outlet 98AK001 is provided on the back side portion of the stick controller 31A, the wind output from the first air outlet 98AK001 hits the hand of the player who operated the stick controller 31A. As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to the display on the image display device 5, the wind is output to the player to notify the player that a big hit has occurred. In this way, at the end timing of the reach effect, an effect for notifying the variable display result is determined and is also referred to as an effect (a suggestion effect that suggests that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state). It should be noted that the air volume output from the first air outlet 98AK001 is constant (for example, the air volume 4) regardless of the setting. The air volume output from the first air outlet 98AK001 may also change depending on the set volume.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral 7 is displayed large, and the jackpot variable display result is derived and displayed. And it is controlled to a big hit game state.

  In addition, in the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-5, the case where the big win is finally shown is shown. However, in the case where the final game is lost, the decorative pattern of the combination of the lost in the stage of FIG. 8-5 (E). Is displayed, and a character image indicating the defeat in the battle effect is displayed. In this case, no wind is output from the first air outlet 98AK001. If the stick controller 31A is not operated after the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A is executed, the result of the battle effect is notified as time passes, and the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the result of the battle effect is notified as time elapses, the wind may not be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 even in the case of a big hit.

  Subsequently, another example of the effect operation of the characteristic portion 98AK will be described. FIG. 8-6 is an example of an effect operation when the reach effect of the horror super-reach is executed and the volume is changed during the reach effect. When the reach production of the horror super-reach is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the characters “horror reach!” Are displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative design is reduced to the upper left part. Displayed. At this time, the sound “horror reach” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the wind is output from the second air blowing port 98AK002 toward the player. Here, it is assumed that the volume is set to 4 which is the maximum value, and the air volume is set to 1. Therefore, the sound “horror reach” is output at the maximum volume.

  For example, when a player who is not good at producing a horror system does not like to execute the reach production of “horror reach” at the maximum volume, an operation of lowering the volume by operating the stick controller 31A is performed. can do. For example, when the volume is decreased from 4 to 1, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (B) and (C), the display indicating the volume on the image display device 5 is changed from 4 to 1, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. , The sound of the reach effect of “horror reach” (BGM or the like) is output at the volume 1 after the change, and the wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002 at the air volume 4.

  By doing in this way, the fall of the production effect by having reduced the sound volume can be ensured by raising the output amount of a wind, and the fall of an extreme production effect can be prevented. Further, an unexpected effect can be executed by increasing the output amount of the wind in spite of decreasing the volume. In FIG. 8-6 (C), a change confirmation sound may be output in addition to the output of the reach effect effect sound (BGM or the like).

  FIG. 8-7 is an example of an effect operation when a volume change operation is performed during a demonstration effect. FIG. 8-7 (A) shows that a predetermined demonstration effect is being executed in the image display device 5. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), during the demonstration production, no sound is generated and no wind is output regardless of the set volume and air volume. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an audio | voice and a wind are output during a demonstration production, become troublesome, and power consumption will increase. During the demonstration production, the volume and air volume may be set to predetermined values (for example, low values) regardless of the set volume and air volume.

  At this time, when the set sound volume is 4 and an operation of lowering the sound volume from 4 to 1 is performed, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C), a display indicating the sound volume in the image display device 5 is displayed. 4 to 1, and a sound of “pin” that is a change confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the changed volume 1, and the wind is generated from the second air blowing port 98AK002 with the changed air volume 4 Is output.

  In this way, even during the silent and windless demonstration production, if there is a volume change operation, the change confirmation sound is output at the changed volume 1 and the changed air volume 4 is used. Wind is output. Thereby, the player etc. before a game start can grasp | ascertain the volume and air volume after a change.

(Modifications related to the feature 98AK)
In this embodiment, an arbitrary volume can be set by a volume change operation by a player or the like, but the volume is determined in advance depending on the contents of the effect, and a specific effect (for example, a reach effect or a notice effect) is being executed. In addition, the wind may be output with an air volume (for example, an air volume inversely proportional to the volume) according to the sound volume in the specific effect.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8C, the air volume output from the second air outlet 98AK002 is set to an air volume inversely proportional to the set volume, but this is not limitative. Instead, it is only necessary to set a different air volume depending on the set volume. For example, the air volume may be set in proportion to the set volume. By doing so, for example, when the volume is changed, the wind is output with an air volume proportional to the changed volume, so that it becomes easier to grasp the changed volume.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first air outlet 98AK001 and the second air outlet 98AK002 are provided as the air outlets that can output the wind. It may be done. In this case, the air volume output from at least some of the air outlets may be made different according to the output volume. The installation position of the air outlet may also be arbitrary.

  Further, in addition to or instead of setting the air volume according to the set sound volume, the period from when the sound is output until the wind is output may be different from the period during which the wind is output. .

  In this embodiment, the volume can be changed even while the game is in progress, but when the game is not being played such as during demonstration production, the volume can be changed by calling the menu screen. Also good. Further, by calling such a menu screen, the presence or absence of wind output and the output frequency may be changed. The presence / absence of wind output and the output frequency may be changed while the game is in progress.

  Further, when the sound volume is changed while the wind is being output, the air volume may be changed after a predetermined period. For example, after the sound volume changing operation is performed, the setting of the air volume may be changed at the timing of ending the sound output being output or the timing of ending the wind output.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, the wind is output from the second air vent 98AK002 to the player at the notification timing of reaching the super-reach (notification of reach title). It was. The wind may be output from the second air outlet 98AK002 only when the reach title is notified, or the wind may be output in accordance with the BGM or sound effect during the subsequent reach performance. Further, during a predetermined period during the reach effect (for example, immediately before the determined effect), the wind may not be output from the second air outlet 98AK002, or the air volume may be reduced.

  When a volume change operation is performed, the air volume may not be changed immediately, but the air volume may be changed after a predetermined period. For example, the period until the air volume is changed may be different depending on whether the volume is increased or decreased. When the volume is further changed during a predetermined period after the volume changing operation (for example, volume 1 → 2 → 3, etc.), the air volume corresponding to the changed volume (for example, air volume 4 → 2, etc.) May be set.

  In addition, a lamp is provided inside or in the vicinity of the first air outlet 98AK001 and / or the second air outlet 98AK002 to make a point etc. when the wind is output, thereby performing an effect of informing that the wind is being output. May be. Further, an effect of notifying that wind is being output may be executed by the image display device 5, the existing game effect lamp 9, or the like.

  In the initial operation when the power is turned on, wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and the second air outlet 98AK002 in order to check the operation of the wind output. In this case, wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and the second air outlet 98AK002 with a constant air volume (for example, 4 which is the maximum value) regardless of the set air volume.

  Further, when an error is notified, wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and / or the second air outlet 98AK002. In this case, wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and / or the second air outlet 98AK002 with a constant air volume (for example, 4 which is the maximum value) regardless of the set air volume. Moreover, you may vary the ventilation port which outputs a wind according to the kind of error.

  Configuration that enables control of advantageous states such as jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and allows the set value to be changed based on a predetermined setting change operation, and set setting values May be provided so that it can be confirmed by display. In this case, when the setting value is being changed (change-permitted state), the volume or air volume changing operation may be prohibited or restricted. When an operation for changing the set value is being performed, if a volume change operation is performed, the set volume and air volume (for example, maximum value to silence and wind) are not changed without changing the set volume or air volume. Audio and wind may be output. At this time, a warning sound indicating that the change in volume is restricted may be output. By doing so, it is possible to prevent troubles in the setting value changing operation.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic portion 98AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 98AK is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Volume control means that can set the volume of at least a specific effect (for example, reach effect) to a plurality of levels including a first volume and a second volume that is larger than the first volume (for example, effect control for executing the process of step 98AKS002) CPU 120),
It is possible to output wind with different air volume when the specific effect is executed at the first volume and when the specific effect is executed at the second volume (for example, the air volume corresponding to the volume in the process of step 98AKS003). CPU 120 for effect control which sets up, FIG. 8-3).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Blower means capable of outputting wind (for example, first fan 98AK011, second fan 98AK012),
The air blowing means can output wind with different air volumes when the specific effect is executed at the first volume and when the specific effect is executed at the second volume (for example, FIG. 8-3). You may do it.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
The wind can be output with a smaller air volume when the specific effect is executed at the second volume than when the specific effect is executed at the first volume (for example, FIG. 8-3). Also good.
According to such a configuration, the volume can be set without hindering the progress of the game.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The volume setting means may set the volume in any of a plurality of stages during the game (for example, FIG. 8-5).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control for executing the effects shown in FIGS. 8-5 (C) to (E)) for executing an suggestion effect (for example, a determined effect) suggesting that the player is controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player. CPU 120),
When the suggestion effect is executed, wind may be output with a predetermined air volume (for example, air volume 4) regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means.
According to such a structure, an unexpected production can be performed and the interest of the game is improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
Provided with operating means (for example, stick controller 31A) that can be operated by the player,
Wind may be output to the player when the player operates the operation means (for example, wind is output from the first air outlet 98AK001 at the time of determination effect to operate the stick controller 31A).
According to such a configuration, the production effect is enhanced.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
Demo performance execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a demonstration effect as shown in FIG. 8-7) capable of executing a demonstration effect when the game is not in progress,
The volume setting means can set the volume to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, silence) when the demonstration effect is being executed,
When the volume is set while the demonstration effect is being executed, wind is output in a different output mode according to the set volume (for example, FIG. 8-7 (C)),
Except when the demonstration effect is being executed and the volume is set, the wind output mode is common (for example, no wind) regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. Also good.
According to such a configuration, since the air volume changes in accordance with the change in volume, it becomes easy to grasp the volume setting status.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
It is possible to control the game in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state)
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change-permitted state that permits a setting value change by the setting means with the start of power supply;
An effect adjustment detecting means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress of step 71AKS019) CPU 120 for effect control to be executed)
Limiting means for restricting execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, in step AKS012 as a power-on command process in step 71AKS012) in the change permission state Production control CPU 120 for executing the process).
According to such a configuration, since execution of control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

(Explanation regarding the feature 99AK)
Next, the feature part 99AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-8 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic portion 99AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 99AK is provided with first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R and second movable bodies 99AK002 as movable bodies that operate according to the effects.

  The first movable body 99AK001L is provided at the upper left position of the gaming machine frame 3, and the first movable body 99AK001R is provided at the upper right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The first movable body 99AK001L and the first movable body 99AK001R are collectively referred to as a first movable body 99AK001. The first movable body 99AK001 is provided so as to be able to perform a projecting (advancing) operation toward the outer side (diagonally upward and downward) of the gaming machine frame 3. As described above, the first movable body 99AK001 is operable to change the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic portion 99AK, the speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the lower left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

  The second movable body 99AK002 is provided at the left position of the gaming machine frame 3. The second movable body AK002 is provided so as to be able to perform a rotation operation clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the player. As described above, the second movable body 99AK002 can operate without changing the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The operation modes of the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 are not limited to this, and any operation may be performed as long as each operation is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 8-8, the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 are provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the player can contact them. Note that the player may not always be able to make contact, and the player may be able to make contact in either a seated state or a standing state. Further, the contact may be possible at a predetermined timing during the game (for example, only when the first movable body 99AK001 is protruding).

  As shown in FIG. 8-9, the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 are connected to the effect control board 12, and operate based on a control signal from the effect control board 12.

  Next, an operation example of the first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8-10 (A) shows the case where the first movable body 99AK001 is at the origin position (position before the operation), and FIG. 8-10 (B) shows the first movable body 99AK001 in the advanced position (half protruding). 8-10 (C) shows the case where the first movable body 99AK001 is in the post-operation position (position that protrudes to the maximum).

  As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) to (C), in the first movable body 99AK001, the rod-like accessory 99AK010 constituting the first movable body 99AK001 is placed outside the gaming machine frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Protrusions (advance).

  As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), when the first movable body 99AK001 is at the origin position (position before the operation), the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 is completely stored in the gaming machine frame 3. Become.

  The rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 of the first movable body 99AK001 is shown in FIG. 8-10 (B) when a predetermined projecting operation condition is satisfied (for example, at the initial operation when the power is turned on or when the reach effect is executed for super reach). As shown in (), it projects in a diagonally upward left direction and a diagonally right upward direction when viewed from the front side. When moving to the post-operation position, it protrudes to the post-operation position as shown in FIG. When the projecting operation condition ends with the end of the reach effect, the rod-like accessory 99AK010 is stored in the limited position shown in FIG. 8-10 (A).

  For example, the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 projects outwardly in response to the normal rotation of the motor included in the first movable body 99AK001 and the normal rotation of the drive gear. Further, the rod-like accessory 99AK010 is retracted into the gaming machine frame 3 in accordance with the reverse rotation of the motor and the reverse rotation of the drive gear.

  In each of the first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R, a light emitting member may be provided so that light can be emitted in accordance with the projecting operation or the like. Further, the protrusions of the respective rod-like members 99AK010 of the first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R are outside of the game frame 30 in the diagonally upward left direction and diagonally upward right direction as seen from the front side as described above. Any projecting operation is possible as long as it projects outward from the gaming machine frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). You may protrude toward a direction, a front direction, and a horizontal direction.

  FIG. 8-11 (A) is a diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the first movable body 99AK001. As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), the first movable body 99AK001 is composed of a rod-like accessory 99AK010, a drive unit 99AK011, an origin position detector 99AK012, a post-operation position detector 99AK013, and a touch sensor 99AK014.

  The rod-like accessory 99AK010 is a rod-like member (an accessory) that performs a protruding operation as shown in FIG. 8-10 in the first movable body 99AK001.

  The drive unit 99AK011 includes a motor, a drive gear, a belt, and the like, and performs a projecting operation of the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 and a storing operation for terminating the projecting. The drive unit 99AK011 drives the rod-like accessory 99AK010 based on a control signal from the effect control board 12, and performs a protruding operation or a storage operation.

  The origin position detector 99AK012 includes sensors (for example, a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, and a button) that can detect that the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 is at the origin position (the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 is completely stored). The

  Sensors (for example, photo sensors, pressure sensors) that can detect that the post-operation position detector 99AK013 and the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 are in the post-operation positions (the position where the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 protrudes to the maximum extent, the position where the protrusion operation has been completed). , Button).

  The touch sensor 99AK014 is a sensor (for example, a capacitive touch sensor or a pressure-sensitive sensor) that can detect that the player has touched the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010. For example, the touch sensor 99AK014 is provided on the tip portion or the side surface of the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010. It is done. The origin position detector 99AK012, the post-operation position detector 99AK013, and the touch sensor 99AK014 can transmit the detection results to the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, the contact-type touch sensor 99AK014 detects that the player has touched the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010. However, the rod-shaped role is detected by a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor. You may make it detect or guess that the player contacted the thing 99AK010.

  In this embodiment, when the touch sensor 99AK014 detects contact with the first movable body 99AK001 (the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010) during the operation of the first movable body 99AK001, the safety of the first movable body 99AK001 can be ensured. In order to prevent a failure, the operation is stopped.

  FIG. 8-11 (B) is a diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the second movable body 99AK002. As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), the second movable body 99AK002 is composed of a circular accessory 99AK020, a drive unit 99AK021, an origin position detector 99AK022, and a rotation detector 99AK023.

  The circular accessory 99AK020 is a member having a circular (hemispherical) outer shape as shown in FIG. 8-8, and rotates clockwise or counterclockwise toward the player. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the circular accessory 99AK020 is provided with a star-shaped (pentagonal) pattern.

  The drive unit 99AK021 includes a motor, a drive gear, a belt, and the like, and rotates the circular accessory 99AK020. The drive unit 99AK021 drives the circular accessory 99AK020 based on the control signal from the effect control board 12, and executes the rotation operation.

  The origin position detector 99AK022 is a sensor that can detect that the circular accessory 99AK020 is at the origin position (for example, a position where one vertex of the pentagram drawn on the circular accessory 99AK020 is in the 12 o'clock direction). For example, it includes a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, and a button. The circular accessory 99AK020 is controlled to return to the origin position when the rotation operation ends (the rotation operation stops at the origin position).

  The rotation detector 99AK022 and a sensor (for example, a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, a button) that can detect that the circular accessory 99AK020 is rotating. The origin position detector 99AK022 and the rotation detector 99AK022 can transmit the detection result to the effect control board 12.

  In this embodiment, when a rotation operation is not detected by the rotation detector 99AK022 during rotation of the second movable body 99AK002, it is determined that an operation error has occurred. When the number of occurrences of the operation error reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), it is determined that the rotation operation is hindered by the player's contact or interference, and the safety of the second movable body 99AK002 is confirmed. In order to prevent damage or failure, the operation is stopped.

  In the second movable body 99AK002, a light emitting member may be provided so that light can be emitted in accordance with a rotation operation or the like. In addition, the second movable body 99AK002 is configured to rotate, but may be operable as long as the second movable body 99AK002 operates. The second movable body 99AK002 may project in the same manner as the first movable body 99AK001. It is also possible to move or move without changing the outer shape.

  FIG. 8-12 (A) is a diagram showing the operation timing and operation contents of the first movable body 99AK001. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), in this embodiment, the first movable body 99AK001 operates when determining the effect for notifying the variable display result (big hit) at the end timing of the reach effect and executing the effect. It protrudes to the rear position and is then stored in the origin position. In addition, when super-reach with a high degree of expectation is executed, superimposing operation is performed to the advance position, and then stored at the origin position.

  FIG. 8-12 (B) is a diagram illustrating the operation timing and operation contents of the second movable body 99AK002. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (B), in this embodiment, the second movable body 99AK002 rotates as a look-ahead notice when a game ball wins the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It is supposed to run. And, the big hit reliability is different depending on the rotation speed. In the example shown in FIG. 8-12 (B), the big hit reliability increases in the order of prefetch notice C> prefetch notice B> prefetch notice A, and the higher the big hit reliability, the faster the rotation speed. In addition to rotating the second movable body 99AK002 as a pre-reading notice, a holding notice for changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display may be executed.

  In addition to the timing shown in FIG. 8-12, for example, the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 may be operated when other effects are executed. There may be a case where the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 operate simultaneously.

  The first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 perform an initial operation when the power is turned on. The initial operation (power-on operation) includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation that performs the same operation as a normal effect operation during the execution of an effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a malfunction occurs in the normal performance operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the normal rendering operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 to the origin position.

  FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the movable body abnormality determination process executed by the effect control CPU 120. The movable body abnormality determination process is a process for determining whether or not there is an abnormal operation of the movable body during the operation of the movable body, and executing control for stopping the operation of the movable body when it is determined that there is an abnormal operation. is there. The output amount setting process may be executed for each timer interrupt, for example, in the effect control process process (after step S161, etc.). In other words, the movable body abnormality determination process may be executed so that the operation abnormality of the movable body can be determined during the period in which the operation of the movable body can be performed.

  In the movable body abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 8-13, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first movable body error flag is on (step 99AKS001). The first movable body error flag is set to ON when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first movable body 99AK001. That is, in step S99AKS001, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is occurring in the first movable body 99AK001.

  When the first movable body error flag is off (step 99AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the first movable body 99AK001 is operating (step 99AKS002). Whether or not the first movable body 99AK001 is in operation is determined whether or not an effect control pattern for operating the first movable body 99AK001 is set, and whether or not effect control based on the effect control pattern is being executed. It may be determined based on whether or not. If the first movable body 99AK001 is in any one of the protruding operation, the storing operation, and the origin return operation after the abnormality determination, it may be determined that the first movable body 99AK001 is in operation.

  Note that the operation to be determined in step 99AKS002 does not include the initial operation (short initial operation, long initial operation). That is, in step 99AKS002, it is determined whether the movable body 99AK001 is operating other than the initial operation. Thereby, during the initial operation, the monitoring of the occurrence of an abnormality (mainly an abnormality caused by the player) in the first movable body 99AK001 can be omitted, and the processing burden can be reduced. On the other hand, occurrence of an abnormality in the first movable body 99AK001 may be monitored in at least one of the initial initial operation and the long initial operation.

  When it is determined that the first movable body 99AK001 is in operation (step 99AKS002; Yes), it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 99AK014 detects contact with the first movable body 99AK001 (bar-shaped accessory 99AK010) ( Step 99AKS003).

  When contact with the first movable body 99AK001 is detected by the touch sensor 99AK014 (step 99AKS003; Yes), control is performed to stop the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 (protruding operation of the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010) (step 99AKS004). ). In step 99AKS004, the drive by the drive unit 99AK011 is stopped.

  The first movable body 99AK001 includes a first movable body 99AK001L and a first movable body 99AK001R. Even when contact is detected by the touch sensor AK014 of one of the first movable bodies 99AK001, both The operation of the first movable body 99AK001 may be stopped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being executed. Note that the operation of only the first movable body 99AK001 on which contact is detected may be stopped.

  Then, the first movable body error flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the first movable body 99AK001 is set to ON (step 99AK005). Further, after stopping the operation of the first movable body 99AK001, a timer for measuring a return operation standby time (for example, 60 seconds) corresponding to the standby time until the first movable body 99AK001 is returned to the home position is set (started) (step 99AKS006). ), The movable body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  If further contact with the first movable body 99AK001 is further detected in step 99AKS003 during the return operation after the abnormality determination, the first movable body 99AK001 is not operated until the initial operation at the time of power-on is succeeded thereafter. It may be in a stopped state. When the first movable body 99AK001 is in the operation stop state, the effect using the first movable body 99AK001 may not be determined by lottery, or it is substituted when the effect using the first movable body 99AK001 is determined. You may make it perform the production of.

  If the first movable body error flag is ON in step 99AKS001 (step 99AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the return operation waiting time set in step 99AKS006 has elapsed (step 99AKS007). If the return operation standby time has not elapsed (step 99AKS007; No), the movable body abnormality determination process ends.

  If the return operation waiting time has elapsed (step 99AKS007; Yes), the first movable body 99AK001 is returned to the origin position (the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 is accommodated), and the first movable is executed (step 99AKS008). The body error flag is cleared to off (step 99AKS009). Thereafter, the movable body abnormality determination process ends.

  When it is determined that the movable body 99AK001 is not operating (step 99AKS002; No), it is determined whether or not the second movable body error flag is on (step 99AKS010). The second movable body error flag is set to ON when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002. That is, in step S99AKS010, it is determined whether an abnormality is occurring in the second movable body 99AK002.

  When the second movable body error flag is off (step 99AKS010; No), it is determined whether or not the second movable body 99AK002 is operating (step 99AKS011). Whether or not the second movable body 99AK002 is in operation is determined whether or not an effect control pattern for operating the second movable body 99AK002 is set, and whether or not effect control based on the effect control pattern is being executed. It may be determined depending on whether or not. Note that if the second movable body 99AK002 is in the operation of either the rotation operation or the origin return operation after the abnormality determination, it may be determined that the second movable body 99AK002 is in operation.

  Note that the operation to be determined in step 99AKS011 does not include the initial operation (short initial operation, long initial operation). That is, in step 99AKS011, it is determined whether or not the movable body 99AK002 is operating other than the initial operation. Thereby, during the initial operation, it is possible to omit the monitoring of the occurrence of the abnormality (mainly the abnormality caused by the player) in the second movable body 99AK002, and the processing burden can be reduced. In contrast, at least one of the initial initial operation and the long initial operation may be monitored for occurrence of abnormality in the second movable body 99AK002.

  When it is determined that the second movable body 99AK002 is in operation (step 99AKS011; Yes), a re-detection time (for example, 5 seconds) until the second movable body 99AK002 is again detected as to whether or not the second movable body 99AK002 is operating normally. Is determined (step 99AKS012).

  When the redetection time has elapsed (step 99AKS012; Yes), it is determined by the rotation detector 99AK023 whether or not the rotation operation of the circular accessory 99AK020 is detected (step 99AKS013). In step 99AKS013, the rotation detector 99AK023 determines whether or not the first movable body 99AK002 is operating normally.

  When the second movable body 99AK002 is not in operation (step 99AKS011; No), when the re-detection time has not elapsed (step 99AKS012; No), or when the rotational movement of the circular accessory 99AK020 is detected (step 99AKS013; Yes), the movable body abnormality determination process ends.

  When the rotational movement of the circular accessory 99AK020 is not detected (step 99AKS013; No), it is determined that an operation abnormality of the second movable body 99AK002 has occurred, and 1 is added to the value of the error counter that counts the number of operation abnormalities. (Step 99AKS014).

  If the value of this error counter is not 2 (step 99AKS015; No), that is, if the value of the error counter is 1 and the operation abnormality of the second movable body 99AK002 is detected for the first time, the second movable body A timer for measuring a redetection time (for example, 5 seconds) until detecting again whether 99AK002 is operating normally is set (started) (step 99AKS020), and the movable body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  If the value of the error counter is 2 (step 99AKS015; Yes), that is, if the second abnormality of the second movable body 99AK002 is detected for the second time, the error counter value is reset to 0 (step 99AKS016). 2 Control for stopping the operation of the movable body 99AK002 (rotational operation of the circular accessory 99AK020) is executed (step 99AKS017). In step 99AKS017, the drive by the drive unit 99AK021 is stopped.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the second movable body 99AK002 is stopped when an operation abnormality is detected twice. During the return operation, the operation may be stopped when an operation abnormality is detected once.

  Then, a second movable body error flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002 is set to ON (step 99AK018). Further, after stopping the operation of the second movable body 99AK002, a timer for measuring a return operation standby time (for example, 60 seconds) corresponding to the standby time until the second movable body 99AK002 is returned to the origin position is set (started) (step 99AKS019). ), The movable body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  If a further abnormal operation is detected in the second movable body 99AK002 in steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015 during the return operation after the abnormality determination, the second movable body 99AK002 is moved until the initial operation at the time of, for example, power-on is succeeded thereafter. You may make it the operation stop state which is not operated. When the second movable body 99AK002 is set in the operation stop state, an effect using the second movable body 99AK002 may not be determined by lottery, or when an effect using the second movable body 99AK002 is determined You may make it perform the production of.

  If the second movable body error flag is ON in step 99AKS010 (step 99AKS010; Yes), it is determined whether or not the return operation waiting time set in step 99AKS019 has elapsed (step 99AKS021). If the return operation standby time has not elapsed (step 99AKS021; No), the movable body abnormality determination process ends.

  If the return operation standby time has elapsed (step 99AKS021; Yes), the second movable body 99AK002 is returned to the origin position (the circular accessory 99AK020 is rotated to return to the origin position), and operation control is executed (step 99AKS022). ), The second movable body error flag is cleared to OFF (step 99AKS023). Thereafter, the movable body abnormality determination process ends.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the first movable body 99AK001 determines that an abnormality has occurred when contact with the first movable body 99AK001 is detected, and the second movable body 99AK002 is not detected to rotate. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Further, the first movable body 99AK001 stops operating when the occurrence of an abnormality is detected once, and the second movable body 99AK002 stops operating when the occurrence of abnormality is detected twice. ing. As described above, by making the abnormality determination method different according to the type of the movable body, it is possible to perform the abnormality determination according to the shape and the operation of the movable body, and it is possible to execute the control for suitably stopping the operation.

(Modified example of the feature 99AK)
In addition, the abnormality determination method of each movable body is not limited to the method of this Example. For example, after the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 starts, the post-operation position detector 99AK013 detects that the rod-shaped accessory 99AK010 is in the post-operation position after a predetermined period (time until moving to the projecting position). If it is not possible, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first movable body 99AK001. In addition, the origin position detector 99AK022 could not detect that the circular accessory 99AK020 was at the origin position after a predetermined period (time until returning to the origin position) after the operation of the second movable body 99AK002 was started. In this case, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002. Further, when a foreign object is detected in the operation direction by a non-contact sensor, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  The movable body abnormality determination method may be determined in consideration of the shape, weight, stiffness, size, position, operation mode, operation speed, torque strength, safety, and the like of the movable body. For example, it is preferable to adopt an abnormality determination method that is easy to detect in a movable body that should be stopped immediately for safety. Moreover, in the same movable body, you may vary the abnormality determination method according to an operation | movement aspect. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the abnormality determination method may be different depending on whether the first movable body 99AK001 operates to the advanced position and the first movable body 99AK001 operates to the protruding position. By doing in this way, suitable operation stop control according to a movable body can be performed.

  The first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 stop the operation when an abnormality is detected during the operation, and perform the operation of returning to the home position when the return operation waiting time elapses after the operation is stopped. However, after the operation is stopped, the movable body may be in an operation stop state without returning to the origin position until the next power-on.

  You may make it provide the abnormality alerting | reporting means which alert | reports the operation | movement abnormality of 1st movable body 99AK001 and / or 2nd movable body 99AK002. The abnormality notification means may be any device that notifies the occurrence of an operation abnormality by displaying on the image display device 5, a lamp point or the like, outputting sound, outputting a signal to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the like. The abnormality notification means may notify the operation abnormality during the initial operation when the operation abnormality during the initial operation is monitored without notifying the operation abnormality during the progress of the game. By doing so, even if an operation abnormality occurs during the progress of the game, the progress of the game is not hindered by notification of the occurrence of the abnormality. In addition, during the initial operation, it becomes possible for an administrator or the like to find an abnormal operation, and it is possible to repair the movable body.

  The presence / absence and operation mode of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002 may be set. For example, the protrusion degree of the protrusion operation of the first movable body 99AK001 and the rotation speed (maximum speed) of the second movable body 99AK002 may be set in advance. By doing in this way, a movable body can be operated by operation | movement suitable for a player's favorite operation | movement, or the convenience of a hall | hole.

  Configuration that enables control of advantageous states such as jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and allows the set value to be changed based on a predetermined setting change operation, and set setting values May be provided so that it can be confirmed by display. When the setting value is being changed (change-permitted state), a short initial operation may be executed as an initial operation of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002. By doing in this way, it can prevent that the trouble of the change operation of a setting value arises by operation | movement of a movable body.

  Further, the short initial operation may be performed when the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, and the short initial operation may not be performed when the change permission state is established. By doing in this way, it can prevent that the trouble of the change operation of a setting value arises by operation | movement of a movable body.

  Further, when the short initial operation is executed when the power is turned on, the abnormality of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002 is monitored by executing the movable body abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 8-13. It may be. In this case, in the operation for changing the setting value or the confirmation operation, a control is executed to immediately stop the operation of the movable body that hinders the operator when an abnormality (for example, one contact) is detected. For a movable body that is unlikely to interfere with the movement, even if an abnormality (for example, an abnormal operation) is detected, the operation may be attempted, and if the abnormality is further abnormal, a control for stopping the operation may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered by the short initial operation.

(Explanation of means related to the feature 99AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature 99AK is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A first effect movable body (for example, a first movable body 99AK001L, a first movable body 99AK001R) provided so that a player can come into contact therewith,
A second effect movable body (for example, a second movable body 99AK002) provided so that a player can contact;
Motion control means for controlling the operations of the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the drive unit 99AK011, the drive unit 99AK021),
The operation control means includes
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the first effect movable body (for example, the process of step 99AKS004 can be executed)
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the second effect movable body (for example, the process of step 99AKS017 can be executed)
The first effect movable body and the second effect movable body are stopped under different conditions (different determinations are executed in step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The first effect movable body is operable to change the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the first movable body 99AK001 projects outwardly as shown in FIG. 8-10).
The second effect movable body may be operable without changing the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the second movable body 99AK002 rotates).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
An abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The operation control means includes
Based on the determination result by the abnormality determination means, it is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the first effect movable body (for example, the process of step 99AKS004 can be executed)
Based on the determination result by the abnormality determination means, it is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the second effect movable body (for example, the process of step 99AKS017 can be executed)
The second effect movable body is controlled to be longer than the first effect movable body until the operation is stopped after it is determined that there is an abnormality (for example, contact is detected in step 99AKS003). If it is, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 may be stopped immediately, and the operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped when the second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
An abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The operation control means includes
The first effect movable body stops the operation when it is determined that there is an abnormality for the first number of times (for example, when the contact is detected once in step 99AKS003, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 is stopped),
The second effect movable body stops operation when it is determined that there is an abnormality for a second number of times greater than the first number of times (for example, when a second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015). The operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
An abnormality determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The abnormality determination means determines that the first effect movable body is abnormal when the first condition is satisfied (for example, in step 99AKS003, the abnormality is determined when contact is detected by the touch sensor 99AK014). ), It is determined that there is an abnormality in the second effect movable body when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (for example, in step 99AKS013, when the rotation operation is not detected by the rotation detector 99AK023, the operation abnormality is detected). May be determined).
According to such a configuration, the operation can be suitably stopped according to the type of the effect movable body.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
An abnormality determining means capable of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013, 99AKS015);
Detecting means for detecting a player's contact (for example, touch sensor 99AK014),
The abnormality determining means determines the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body based on the detection result by the detecting means (for example, in step 99AKS003, it is abnormal when contact is detected by the touch sensor 99AK014). (Determine).
According to such a structure, the movable body for production can be operated safely.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
The first effect movable body and the second effect movable body are operable between an origin position and a post-operation position, respectively.
The operation control means includes
After executing the control to stop the operation during the operation with the first effect movable body, it is possible to execute the control to move the first effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period of time (for example, If it is determined in step 99AKS007 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS008 is executed).
After executing the control to stop the operation during the operation with the second effect movable body, it is possible to execute the control to move the second effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period of time (for example, If it is determined in step 99AKS021 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS022 may be executed).
According to such a structure, the fall of the interest of a game can be prevented.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be operated in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014), and the like.
A movable control means (for example, step) capable of executing at least control of return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member. A production control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012, and the like.
The movable control means may perform control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS007) when the change is permitted.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

(9) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (8),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be operated in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014), and the like.
At least movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012) capable of executing a return operation control for returning the movable member to the origin position;
The movable control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the return operation may not be performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
According to such a configuration, when the change is permitted, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

(Description of configuration related to other features)
Next, other features in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature can be used to control the advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and to change the set value based on a predetermined setting change operation A configuration is provided for making it possible to confirm the set value displayed on the screen. And the setting value currently set can be displayed by the structure which can display the information regarding game values, such as a prize ball provided based on game media, such as a game ball approaching a predetermined area.

  FIG. 9A is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this feature. The same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the structure which is common in the said embodiment. For example, the output circuit 111 only needs to have the same configuration as the solenoid circuit 111. 4A of 1st special symbol displays and the 2nd special symbol display 4B should just have the structure similar to 4A of 1st special symbol display apparatuses and the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B. The effect display device 5 only needs to have the same configuration as the image display device 5. The case where the display result is “out of” (Hiragana) is the same as the case where the display result is “lost” (katakana). The first general prize port switch 26A, the second general prize port switch 26B, the third general prize port switch 26C, and the fourth general prize port switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) one of the plurality of general prize ports 10. And a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

  Connected to the effect control board 12 are operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member serving as a movable accessory (movable effect device), and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. . The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be any motors or electromagnetic solenoids. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance sensor. The effect control board 12 is provided with a real time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

  In this embodiment, the second big prize opening provided separately from the first big prize opening which is a big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 when controlled to the small hit gaming state, It will be in an open state in a predetermined open mode. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the second big prize opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. State. In the present embodiment, the second big prize opening is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit gaming state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be opened multiple times in the small hit gaming state. When the solenoid 83 for the second grand prize opening door is on, the second big prize opening is opened by the second big prize opening door, and the game ball passes (enters) the second grand prize opening. It becomes easy. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second grand prize opening door is in the OFF state, the second big prize opening is closed by the second big prize opening door, and the game ball passes through the second grand prize opening ( (Cannot enter) In this way, the second grand prize winning opening changes between an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition to the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the second grand prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) through the second big prize port is provided. May be.

  The count switch 23 serves as a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) through the first big winning opening. A game ball passing (entering) the second grand prize opening is detected by the second count switch by passing through a second count switch installed in the second big prize opening. Based on the detection of game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) through the opened second grand prize port, the game ball passes through (or enters) another normal prize port, such as the first start prize port or the second start prize port. ) More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the second grand prize opening is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second big prize opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second grand prize opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the second big prize opening, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A third count switch and a fourth count switch through which game balls can pass are installed inside the second grand prize opening. The game ball that has passed (entered) through the second big winning opening passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing through the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch by passing through the fourth count switch.

  In this embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the third count switch during the small hit game, the game state after the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, if the path of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like and the game ball is detected by the third count switch during the period in which the second big prize opening door is open during the small hit game, Since the fraud that is controlled to the big hit gaming state advantageous to the player becomes possible, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment stops the game in such a case.

  A regulating member that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided inside the second grand prize opening. The restricting member is provided so as to be able to change between a restricted state that restricts the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch and an allowable state that allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch. It has been.

  In the small hit gaming state, when a game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes the third count switch, it becomes a “big hit” based on the passing of the third count switch of the game ball (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passing of the gaming ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hit gaming state passes the fourth count switch, it is not a “big hit”. That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passing of the gaming ball by the fourth count switch.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball, the period or the predetermined number of times until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses. For example, during the period until ten (10) winning balls are generated, the second grand prize opening is set in an open state. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second grand prize opening is set to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, when the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big prize opening is controlled to the first state. It is not limited, and the first big prize opening may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second grand prize opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won the second grand prize opening). Good.

  FIG. 9-2 is a rear view showing the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the power supply board 17 and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 29 also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 30.

  The main board 11 includes a door opening sensor 90 that detects the opening of the glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first and second winning prize openings. Various sensors such as a door sensor 91 are connected, and a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on detection signals output from these sensors is also provided. The switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 receives the reset signal, the power-off signal, and the clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 201 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is disposed at the center of the main substrate 11. A display changeover switch 30 is arranged. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is connected to each award port (first grand award port, second major award port, second start award port, first start award port, general award port, hereinafter "entrance area". The number of game balls that entered the game ball is counted, and various winning information such as run ratios and role ratios are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the winning information is displayed. In this way, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as a connection ratio and a role ratio after installation in the amusement hall. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is normal to design the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not the adjustment has been made and what kind of adjustment has been made. As a result of the adjustment, the game ball enters the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Is confirmed (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence and content of adjustment after installation.

  The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply power from an AC power supply (AC100V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is sealed in a substrate case 202 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the upper right side of the back surface of the power supply board 17 and a setting. There is provided a setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate) in the changed state. The power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power switch AK002.

  The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff members who own it can operate. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires a key operation, only a staff member having a key for operating the lock switch 51 can be operated among the staff members in the game hall. The lock switch 51 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation with a predetermined key and a switch that can execute an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation.

  When a power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, predetermined operations using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001 such as an on / off switching operation on the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 are performed. May be. The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches at the same time as the power is turned on using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 are only required to be disposed at positions where simultaneous operations can be performed by an attendant at the game hall. As described above, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as an on / off switching operation and a pressing operation performed by an attendant of the game hall in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. It is configured.

  In the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are provided nozzles (discharge ports) for discharging the game balls that have won the prize holes and the game balls that have entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided with a discharge port switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a released game ball). A signal from the discharge port switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

  9-3 is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command used by a present Example. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. This command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  The command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the special symbol variation display in the special game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the fluctuation display result notification command, when the fluctuation display result is “out of”, “big hit” or “small hit”, the decision result (predetermined result), or the fluctuation display result is “big hit” Different EXT data is set in accordance with a determination result (a jackpot type determination result) of which one of a plurality of types of jackpot types is selected.

  The variable display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variation display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variation display result is “out of range”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C”. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined determination result that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit B”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (decision) of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been cleared in accordance with the initialization in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply by the power-on in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command for designating the start of a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed when power supply by power-on in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that designates execution of a power failure recovery process corresponding to power failure recovery. Command 93XXH is a setting change end command for designating the end of the setting change state.

  In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to a setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to a setting value newly set by the change in the setting change state or a setting value that is continuously set without being changed. When the setting value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to “1”, and the command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to “2”. Then, the command 9302H may specify that the setting value is set to “3”. Alternatively, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared as the setting change end command, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, a set value specifying command for specifying a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared as an effect control command different from the setting change end command. In addition to the case where the set value designation command is transmitted along with the transmission of the setting change end command, for example, in response to the transmission of the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the setting value designation command corresponds to the variation start at each time of the special figure game. May be transmitted. Further, for example, a set value designation command may be transmitted in accordance with a predetermined number of fluctuation displays, such as every tenth fluctuation start in a special figure game. Instead of these, or in addition to these, a set value designation command may be transmitted along with transmission of a hit start designation command or a hit end designation command. A set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command for designating the start of a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed when power supply is started by turning on the power in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command for designating the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time reduction control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and the command 9501H is a gaming state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state) , The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the short time state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (demonstration screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the progress stop of the game in the customer waiting state.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open designation command for designating that it is a period in which the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a designation command after opening the big prize opening that designates a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set in accordance with the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the big winning mouth opening notification command and the big winning mouth opening notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. The first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A is established. The command B200H indicates that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. Based on this, the second start opening prize designation command is used to notify that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory count. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command D100H is a V winning notification designation command for notifying that the third count switch is turned on because the game ball has passed the third count switch, that is, V winning. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control to execute a V prize notification effect for notifying that a V prize has been won based on reception of a V prize notification designation command. In the V winning notification effect, different effect patterns may be determined according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the determination ratios of the plurality of effect patterns may be different. In this way, the set value may be suggested by the effect mode of the V prize notification effect. For example, when the effect image indicating “V” is rotated and displayed as an effect mode of the V prize notification effect, an effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and an effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise are included. It may be. Alternatively, a plurality of effect modes in which display colors of effect images indicating “V” are made different may be included. Then, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V winning notification designation command. Thereby, when the V winning notification effect is executed, the effect mode according to the set value can be appropriately determined.

  FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value that is a game random number counted on the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and for determining the general display display result. The numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the random values MR4 and MR4 is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the random number values MR1 to MR5 are used as values in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the non-reach loss variation pattern is also referred to as a non-reach variation pattern, and the reach loss variation pattern is also referred to as a reach variation pattern. In addition, a variation pattern in which the display result is “big hit” is also referred to as a big hit variation pattern, and a variation pattern in which the display result is “small hit” is also referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach, such as normal reach α, normal reach β,. A variation pattern may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  The ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1), a display result determination table (setting value 2), a display result determination table (setting value 3), a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), and a jackpot type determination. A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, and the like are stored.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probabilities (the payout rate) for the big hit and the small hit change according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process, the winning probabilities (the winning rate) for the big hit and the small hit are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the highest payout rate, and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in order of 2, 3, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram of a display result determination table. A hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set in the display result determination table. In the display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set.

  FIG. 9-6 (A) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1. When the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, if the first special symbol is the target of variable display, the setting value is “ It is set by winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/99) than in the case of “2” and “3”, and a part of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the big hit. Winning a small hit with a higher probability (1/50) than when the values are “2” and “3”. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 and the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the decision value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variation special figure designation buffer is first. Even if the second special symbol is set as a variable display target, the same probability (1/99) as that when the first special symbol is set as a variable display target is set to a big hit. Is won, and half of these decision values are set as decision values corresponding to the small hits, so that a higher probability (100/200) than the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display. ) To win a small hit.

  FIG. 9-6 (B) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the jackpot will be hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the setting value is “1”. In addition to winning, some of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to the small hits, so that the probability of hitting the small hits is lower (1/99) than when the set value is “1”. It has come to win. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as when the variation special figure designation buffer is first. Even if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the same probability (1/150) as the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display is a big hit. And a half of these determination values is set as a determination value corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol has a higher probability than the case where the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, and In this case, the player wins a small hit with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is “1”.

  FIG. 9-6 (C) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is If it is not set, and therefore the first special symbol is subject to variable display, it will be a big hit with a lower probability (1/200) than when the set value is “1” or “2” Wins, but does not win a small win (winning probability: 0). When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 and the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as when the variation special figure designation buffer is first. Even if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the same probability (1/200) as the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display is a big hit. And a half of these determination values is set as a determination value corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol has a higher probability than the case where the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, and , The winning value is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set values are “1” and “2”.

  The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the MR1 value matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (the big hit A˜) Decide to be a big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches any hit determination value corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. Note that “probability” indicates the probability (ratio) of big hit and the probability (ratio) of small hit. Determining whether or not to win a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a big hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not to make it. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol. As described above, the probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, if the set value is changed, one setting is set in a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Will be changed to other settings.

  In this embodiment, in each display result determination table, the winning probabilities for the small hits are the same when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, but the small hits are in the order of the setting values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be lowered. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is made lower in the order of the setting values 1, 2, and 3, but the same as when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the second. In addition, the same winning probability may be used for all set values.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit. However, the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, The determination is made using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. You may make it carry out using a separate table by the case where a fluctuation special figure designation | designated buffer is the 1st, and the case where it is the 2nd.

  In this embodiment, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used, the determination values other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit are determined as the determination values corresponding to the small hit. Not set, that is, small hits were not won, but some judgment values other than the judgment values corresponding to big hits are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that small hits are won It may be. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability varies depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In this embodiment, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 There may be two or four or more (for example, six) set values that can be set. In addition, the player's advantage according to the set value is not limited to the advantage that the player becomes more advantageous as the set value is smaller, and the player's advantage becomes higher as the set value is larger. Also good. For example, when the set value is composed of 6 stages of 1 to 6, 1 is the lowest payout rate, the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, the higher the payout rate, It may be one with the highest payout rate. Thus, the larger the value is, the lower the advantage for the player when 1 is set as the set value, and the highest advantage for the player when 6 is set. The advantage may be increased stepwise.

  FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram of a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. The big hit type determination table is one of the big hit types A to C based on the random number for determining the hit type (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol. Referred to to determine. The small hit type determination table determines whether the small hit type is small hit A or small hit B based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. Referred to to determine. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game with the big hit type of the big hit D is executed. It has become. Further, when the game ball passes the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game with the big hit type being the big hit E is executed. . These big hits D and big hits E are not big hit types determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning. The jackpot type is determined by whether or not the 3-count switch is passed.

  FIG. 9-7 (A) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). Referenced when making decisions.

  FIG. 9-7 (B) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed), Referenced when making decisions.

  FIG. 9-7 (C) shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when determining the small hit type regardless of whether the game ball is in the reserved storage based on which one of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won. .

  9-8 is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot classification in a present Example. In this embodiment, the big hit types are big hit A and big hit D in which the time reduction control is not executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, and big hit B, big hit C and big hit E in which the short time control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. Is set. Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot C and jackpot E are the jackpots that are the most advantageous for the player, and jackpots A and jackpots D are the jackpots that are the most disadvantageous for the player. Further, since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a small hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Of these jackpots A to E, the jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit A ends, the time-shortening control is not executed. The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the first big prize opening is changed to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit B is finished, the time-shortening control is executed until 20 special figure games are executed or until a big hit occurs again until 20 special figure games are executed. The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) in which the first big prize opening is changed to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit C is finished, the time-shortening control is executed until 100 special figure games are executed or until a big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed. The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the second big prize opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit gaming state of big hit D is completed, the time-shortening control is not executed. The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) for changing the second big prize opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit E is finished, the time-shortening control is executed until 100 special figure games are executed or until the big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed.

  Note that the jackpot D and jackpot E have the second winning prize opening as the target winning prize opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first big prize opening may be used. That is, the second big winning opening is opened for the small hit game, and the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hit game are replaced with the first big winning opening as the first big winning game. Open the grand prize opening.

  In the short-time state, the probability of “per normal map” increases, so that small hits are more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the short-time state, there is a case where a big hit occurs as a result of displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and there is a case where a big win occurs when a game ball wins a V during a small hit game. It becomes easy to generate continuously without going through the state, and a so-called continuous state is obtained.

  In the time-saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B, the number of special figure games for which the short time control is executed is set to 20, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games, and the game ball is The rate of passing the 3 count switch (the rate at which the game ball wins V and wins a big hit during 20 special game games) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the short-time state after the big hit game of big hit C and big hit E, since the number of special figure games for which the short-time control is executed is set to 100 times, a small hit occurs during 100 special figure games. The percentage of game balls passing through the third count switch (the percentage of game balls winning V during 100 special game games) is set to almost 100%.

  In this embodiment, five types of jackpot A to jackpot E are provided as jackpot types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. The following types may be provided.

  In the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 49 of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 50 ˜149 are assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the set value is “2”, in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 149 are assigned to the big hit A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299. 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C for which the time reduction control is executed at the end of the big hit game is low in the order of the setting values 1, 2, and 3. It is trying to become.

  In the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 29 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are allocated to the jackpot A, 30 Up to 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the set value is “2”, among the MR2 determination value ranges 0 to 299, 0 to 69 are assigned to the big hit A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the big hit A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the big hit B out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299. 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hits B and C at which the time reduction control is executed at the end of the big hit game is the big hit in the special symbol game of the first special symbol It is higher than the case where this occurs, and decreases in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the ratio of determining the big hit type as the big hit C is the highest, then the ratio of determining the big hit B is high, and the ratio of determining the big hit A as the big hit A The lowest (big hit type determination ratio at setting value 1: big hit C> big hit B> big hit A). When the set value is 2, when the big hit type is the big hit B, the decision rate is the highest, then the big hit A is decided at a high rate, and the big hit C is decided at the lowest rate (the set value). Big hit type determination ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Further, when the set value is 3, the ratio of determining the big hit type as the big hit A is the highest, then the ratio of determining the big hit B is high, and the ratio of determining the big hit C is the lowest. (Big hit type determination ratio at setting value 3: big hit A> big hit B> big hit C).

  Depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that are not determined among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. In other words, depending on the set value, the determination rate of the jackpot type is different, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100% Included in determining by percentage.

  In the small hit type determination table, when the set value is “1”, 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small. Is assigned to B. Also, when the set value is “2”, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. Yes. Also, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hit A out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. Yes. As described above, when a V-winning big win occurs during the small hit game, the ratio of determining the big hit E in which the number of special-purpose games for which the time-shortening control is executed after the big hit game is 100 is 20 times. It is higher than the ratio for determining the big hit D and decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small hit type B is determined at a higher rate than the small hit A as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. Accordingly, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot E is higher than the ratio at which the jackpot D is determined (the jackpot type determination ratio by the V winning at the setting value 1: jackpot E> jackpot D). Also, if the set value is 2, the small hit type is determined at the same rate as the small hit A and the small hit B, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. The ratio that the big hit type is determined to be the big hit D and the ratio that is determined to the big hit E are equal to each other (the big hit type determination ratio by the V winning at the setting value 2: big hit E = big hit D). Further, when the set value is 3, when the small hit type is determined at a higher rate than the small hit B as the small hit type, a V winning is generated during the small hit game. The ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is higher than the ratio at which the jackpot E is determined (the jackpot type determination ratio by the V winning at the set value 1: jackpot D> jackpot E).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a big hit and the determination ratio of the jackpot type when a V prize is generated differ according to the set value set. In other words, the type of the small hit gaming state that is controlled according to the set value is changed, and the type of the big hit gaming state that is controlled when the V winning is generated may change. It is designed to improve the fun of playing games.

  Depending on the set value, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hits A and B. In other words, the determination rate of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, that one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. When the small hit types are determined at different ratios according to the fluctuation special chart, there may be a small hit classification that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B depending on the fluctuation special chart. In other words, in order to determine the small hit type at a different ratio according to the fluctuation chart, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. It also includes determining at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The big hit type and the small hit type are not limited to those having different determination ratios depending on the set value, and the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

  Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming property itself is not limited to that which does not change, and the gaming property may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game probability that loops at a rate of 1/320 in the normal state and 65% in the probability variation state (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the big hit game ends based on the fact that the game ball passes the third count switch during the big hit game While controlling the subsequent gaming state to the probable variation state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a gameability (so-called V-probability variation type) in which the proportion of the game ball passing through the third count switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. When the setting value set to 3 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game ball passes through the third count switch during the high base (during short-time control). Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state (so-called one two-kind mixed type) based on the. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as 1 to 3, the gameability is the same, but the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than those in the case where these set values are any one of 1-3. Thus, a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4). In the case where the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect every time the game ball passes the third count switch) When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to the probable change state or the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the third count switch) May be used.

  The ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on a random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the predetermined determination result. As the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the fluctuation display result is predetermined as “big hit” and the fluctuation display result as “small hit” are predetermined. A big hit variation pattern determination table to be used at the time of occurrence and a loss variation pattern determination table to be used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “out of”.

  9-9 is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for big hits, and the variation pattern determination table for small hits. The jackpot variation pattern determination table is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern based on the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. The small hit variation pattern determination table is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 9-9 (A) shows a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A). The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) is referred to when the big hit type is big hit A. In the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, the fluctuation pattern for the normal reach big hit (PB1-1) is 0 to 300 in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997. ), 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for the super reach α big hit, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) for the super reach β big hit. ing. When the set value is “2”, in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “3”, in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big.

  FIG. 9-9 (B) shows a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B, big hit C). The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C) is referred to when the big hit type is big hit B or big hit C. In the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 100 out of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 is the fluctuation pattern for normal reach big hit ( PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α, and 351 to 997 are fluctuation patterns (PB1-3) per super reach β Assigned to. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big hit.

  The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) and the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C) include a normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1) and a super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1- 2) For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3) per super-reach β, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. When the big hit A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is higher than the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit, In addition, the setting values are decreased in the order of 1, 2, and 3. In addition, when the big hit B or big hit C is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) for the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and decreases in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, the super reach β is easily determined when the big hit type is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, and the super reach α is determined when the big hit type is “big hit A”. As a result, the determination value is assigned to increase the player's expectation that a “big hit B” or “big hit C” will occur when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed. I can.

  FIG. 9-9 (C) shows a small hit variation pattern determination table. In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, even if the set value is “1”, “2”, or “3”, the range from 0 to 997 in the MR3 determination value ranges from 0 to 997. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. It has been. In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. The small hit variation pattern may be determined from the plurality of variation patterns at different ratios with the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”.

  FIG. 9-10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table for loss. The deviation variation pattern determination table is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination random value MR3 when it is determined that the variation display symbol is a variation symbol.

  FIG. 9-10 (A) shows the deviation variation pattern determination table A. The deviation variation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in a low base state in which the gaming state is not subjected to the time-saving control. In the deviation variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach variation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α variation variation pattern (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern (PA2-3) of reach β out of a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  FIG. 9-10 (B) shows the deviation variation pattern determination table B. The deviation variation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the deviation variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved memories of 2 to 4. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of deviation and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of superreach β. Yes.

  FIG. 9-10 (C) shows the deviation variation pattern determination table C. The variation pattern determination table C for loss is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the deviation variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of deviation and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of superreach β. Yes.

  FIG. 9-10 (D) shows the deviation variation pattern determination table D. The deviation variation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is a high base state in which time-shortening control is performed. In the fluctuation pattern determination table D for deviation, the shortened non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time reduction control. -2) A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern (PA2-3) of super-reach β out of a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  When the deviation variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that for determining the super reach variation pattern and decreases in the order of the setting values 1, 2, and 3. It is supposed to be. In addition, when using the deviation variation pattern determination tables A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, among the determination values, 701 to 900 are super-reach α variation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super-reach β deviations. If each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, if the fluctuation display result is out of place, the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the presentation effect from deteriorating due to the fact that the variable display by is not executed.

  The “common determination ratio” means that the determination ratio is completely the same at different setting values (this embodiment), or the determination ratio is the same at different setting values (for example, the setting value). 1 to the set value 3), the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1%. If the fluctuation display result is out of place, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of super reach is the same regardless of the set value, and if the fluctuation display result is out of place, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratios of all non-reach, normal reach, and super reach fluctuation patterns may be the same, or only the non-reach and normal reach fluctuation pattern determination ratios. It may be the same. When the fluctuation display result is out of place, regardless of the set value, the super-reach α is determined to be the setting value for which both the deviation fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β deviation deviation pattern determination ratio are set. However, it is not limited to the same form, and when the fluctuation display result is out of place, only one of the determination ratio of the deviation pattern of the super reach α and the determination ratio of the deviation pattern of the super reach β is determined. The determination ratio may be the same regardless of the set value. When the fluctuation display result is out of place, regardless of the set value, the super-reach α is determined to be the setting value for which both the deviation fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β deviation deviation pattern determination ratio are set. Regardless of the form that is the same regardless, even when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the set value that sets the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach big hit regardless of the set value It may be the same regardless. When the fluctuation display result is out of place, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach and normal reach differs depending on the set value that is set, and depending on the set value, There may be one or more undecided variation patterns among the variation pattern of reach and the variation pattern of normal reach. The fact that the variation pattern determination ratio differs depending on the set value is that either one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or a specific variation pattern is a ratio of 100%. It is also included in the decision. The present invention is not limited to a mode in which a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table for detachment that differs depending on the total number of reserved memories, but the number of reserved memories in a special symbol to be changed (for example, a variable display of the first special symbol) The variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern determination table for detachment that differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol when executing the symbol, and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. May be determined.

  In each deviation variation pattern determination table, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value from 1 to 3, the super reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is displayed. The range of assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the off probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation (super reach deviation deviation) The appearance rate of the variation pattern is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display is not limited to a form in which the ratio executed in the variation pattern of super-reach is different, the jackpot probability for each setting value and In consideration of the loss probability, the fluctuation display may be executed in the same pattern as the fluctuation pattern of the super-reach, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIGS. 9-11 show the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 and is an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  151 A of 1st special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage parts memorize | store the pending data regarding the variable display of the 1st special figure in 4 A of 1st special symbol displays. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit 151A associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc., which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, are reserved data. This is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The first start condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A and a start winning is generated. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure has not been started yet, and the variable display result in this special figure game is held. It becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on (special map display result).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B stores holding data related to variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the hold number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and sets the second start condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc., which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, are reserved data. This is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The second start condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a start winning is generated. The hold data stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not been started yet and has been held, and the variable display result in this special figure game It becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on (special map display result).

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The general-purpose holding storage unit 151C stores the holding information of the general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure hold storage unit 151C associates with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the software 103 can be updated by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  A description will be given of the totaling of game balls and the display of the proportions of the game balls on the main board 11 of this embodiment. The main board 11 has information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls for winning at the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls for winning at the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first large The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are input and the number of fired balls is totaled and the display monitor 29 counts the first winning hole and the number of the winning balls out of the total number of winning balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of winning balls by winning the second big winning opening (attacker), and the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls Role (%), which is the ratio of the number of winning balls by winning the 1st prize winning opening and 2nd winning opening (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of played balls Is displayed. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive consecutive feature winning balls) obtained by winning the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio means the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in winning the first and second winning winning openings (attackers) ( It is the ratio of the following number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is based on the number of winning balls in the 1st Grand Prize Winner and the 2nd Grand Prize Winner (Attacker) and the 2nd starting prize opening (Den Chu) Number of winning balls and winning balls by winning in winning holes (first starting prize opening, general winning prize opening) other than the first big prize opening, the second big prize winning opening (Attacker), and the second starting winning prize opening (Den Chu) The sum of numbers. The first grand prize opening, the second big prize opening (attacker), and the second starting prize opening (electrical chew) are variable actors, and the winning range of the game ball is changed by changing the passable width of the game ball. It is an accessory whose expected ratio varies. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning opening, the second winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed roles, The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the calculation and calculation method of information related to game winnings, as for the ratio and role ratio, the winning ball in the first start winning hole (heso) and the general winning hole (sode) with 6000 winning balls Number (general award ball number), the number of the normal electric role award ball (the number of electric chew award balls), which is the number of award balls won by winning the second starting prize opening (electrical chew), the first grand prize winning port and the second grand prize winning The number of special electoral award balls (the number of attacker award balls), which is the number of winning balls for winning a prize (attacker), is counted. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award ball number), the number of ordinary electoral award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), and the special electric The number of winning balls (the number of attacker winning balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 is stored in an equivalent amount (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and role ratio (%) can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for 60000 prize balls is counted. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 29 has a base (%) calculated based on the continuous ratio (%), the winning ratio (%), the cumulative connecting ratio (%), the winning ratio (%), and 60000 prize balls. Base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of winning balls by winning at the first start winning opening (heso) counted by the progress of the game, The number of winning balls due to winning, and the number of winning balls due to winning at the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) for 6000 is reflected in the ratio (%) for 60000 displayed after that, There may be a discrepancy between the continuous ratio (%) and the duty ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning the 1st start winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the 2nd starting winning opening (Den Chu), the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) If the number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are entered and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, display timing of 6000 consecutive ratios (%), etc.), such a discrepancy Can be prevented.

  Note that a storage area for storing information related to game winning in this embodiment is provided for each set value. The ball, the winning ball total, and the total driving-in are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value that has been set. For this reason, the connection ratio, role ratio, and base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

  As an example of the calculation method, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second start winning opening (Den Chu) and the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the bonus rate (role ratio (%)) in the case where the number of winning ball winnings, which is the sum of the number of winning balls due to winning, is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning balls acquired means the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutively-acquired balls acquired is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker. The total number of hits refers to the cumulative number of game media that have been put into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. For this reason, a connection ratio can be calculated | required by following (1) Formula. Further, the role ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [number of consecutive winning balls / total number of winnings] × 100 (1)

  Ratio = [(number of consecutive feature winning balls + number of winning balls) / total winning number] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of shots] × 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the bonus rate is calculated as 0.70 (3 digits after the decimal point rounded down) by dividing 42000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the arithmetic operation after the decimal point, the operation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning characters is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the ratio of the long-term bonuses. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls acquired. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  A third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation with the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down to 00EAh for the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h. Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation. Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%. In the third calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls is 10 times is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and approximates the original value.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 are divided as a divisor for 19876 and the ratio is calculated. 1987/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with a decimal point must be avoided, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following. In the division of 19876/34321, 34321 of the denominator is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio is 57% (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799. If this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and if replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% on the display. % Error may be displayed, but even in the display of 1% error, the duty ratio (%) (or continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Further, the error gradually increases even when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of acquired balls of a specific number or more (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter, the display of the role (%) and the continuous ratio (%) is not performed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that the error may be large may be notified by emitting light from a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The storage area for storing information related to game winnings may not be initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated, and may be stored continuously. This storage area includes a ring buffer, and may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a prize ball total number buffer, or the like that totals information related to game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters of 2 bytes at maximum. . Note that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, initialization is performed, the value of the number of winning balls is greater than the value of the total number of winning balls stored, Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to game winnings when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive feature-acquired balls is greater than the number of acquired balls Processing may be performed. Further, an error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or an error display or warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after being performed.

  When a trouble occurs in the calculation of the link ratio or the role ratio, the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated when the calculation of the link ratio or the role ratio is unavoidable. By doing so, the data used for the connection ratio and the role ratio stored in the nonvolatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch may be disposed on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an operator of the game hall cannot easily operate, for example, a predetermined position of the power supply board 17. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

  The substrate case 201 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electrical components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an attendant or the like of a game hall who wants to visually recognize the main board 11.

  The display monitor 29 displays the role ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value for every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To do. In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or an attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to a continuous ratio ( %), There is a possibility that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the role ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and are sequentially displayed. When the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when 2 7 segments are provided), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 29, numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under specific conditions. In addition, it is not limited to the form which detects that the game medium won by the sensor provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew, and individually counts the number of each prize ball based on the detection result. Using the sensor provided after the discharge passage where the game media won in the game and the game media won in the electric chew merge, the number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls based on the detection results May be counted.

  The main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2. In addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided on the back side of the game board 2. The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passage number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth counter A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. It should be noted that the number of winnings at the first grand prize opening is not limited to a form in which the number of winnings at the first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening (attacker) is counted by the big winning number counter. A first grand prize counter and a second grand prize counter that counts the number of prizes received at the second grand prize opening are individually provided so that the number of winning prizes at the first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening are The number of winnings may be totaled individually, and the number of winnings may be summed to obtain the number of winnings for the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning port switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The big prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

  FIG. 9-12 shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is accommodated in the board case 201. Caulking pins 11B are attached to the substrate case 201. Since the caulking pin 11B is provided, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and an illegal act on the main board 11 is prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped substrate case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a seal seal 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The seal seal 11S is pasted across, for example, the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The seal seal 11S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is disposed at a position that is not hidden by the seal seal 11S.

  As shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. . Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is configured by seven segments configured by seven segments that draw a character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  As shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 29. The set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display portion 29A of the first digit, and the summation period is displayed on the second display portion 29B of the second digit and the third display portion 29C of the third digit. The numerical values are displayed in percentage on the fourth display portion 29D of the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 29E of the fifth digit. In display No1, a short-term run ratio is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. In display No. 3, the total cumulative run ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. In display No5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Is done. The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is once reset. In the above example, the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the run ratio may be a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls by winning a big winning opening in the big hit gaming state. Also, the ratio of the winnings is the percentage of the total number of winning balls that is based on the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls in the winning game in the big hit gaming state. Also good. The base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of the display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term role ratio of the display No2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term ratio of the display No1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term role ratio of the display No2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative role of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E, and the total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is When displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit. “B6.” Is displayed on 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display).

  The main board 11 calculates the ratio, role ratio, and base in the first grand prize opening, the second big prize opening (attacker), the first starting prize opening, the second starting prize opening, and the first general prize opening. The number of game balls that have entered the fourth general prize opening and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port are tabulated. In the main process, the CPU 103 performs the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning port switch 26A to the fourth general port. Switch processing for confirming the state (presence / absence of a detection signal) of each of the winning port switch 26D and the outlet port switch 70 is performed. In the switch processing, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. And when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, When the values of the first starting winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added and a detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added and the first general winning opening switch 26A is added. When a detection signal is output from the second general prize opening switch 26B, the third general prize opening switch 26C, or the fourth general prize opening switch 26D, the first general prize winning counter, the second general winning prize counter, The values of the 3 general winning number counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the discharge port switch 70, the value of the driving number counter is added. , Counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. Note that the value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch process, the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing a separate counting program to be executed, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  FIG. 9-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of winning balls for each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning mouth based on the total number of winning game balls to each winning mouth, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning mouth. Let The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one winning with respect to the winning opening and the number of winning for the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening. The number of prize balls for each of the divided prize mouths is as follows: general prize mouth prize balls (the prize balls for winning from the first general prize mouth to the fourth general prize mouth (Sode)), the first start prize mouth prize balls (first 1 The number of winning balls in the starting prize opening (Hesso), ordinary electric award ball (awarding ball in the electric Chu), special electric award ball (awarding ball in the attacker) is there. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls and the number of game balls that have been driven. The CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won in the general prize opening and the number of game balls won in the first start prize opening, but the number of game balls won in the general prize opening and the first start. The number of game balls won at the winning opening may be summed up. In addition, the number of winning balls for the general winning opening and the number of winning balls for the first starting winning opening are calculated separately, but the number of winning balls for the general winning opening and the first starting winning opening are calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of winning balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes 10 first storage areas to 10th storage areas, each of which has a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). The active buffer also includes a 0th storage area composed of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth that increases as the game progresses is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) and the total number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total accumulated for each winning opening. Yes. The storage area of the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be spared. I can remember.

  The RAM 102 stores a ratio ratio storage area for storing ratios and ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the last 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area is provided. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the role and run ratio of 10 sets and the total cumulative based on the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls in each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative. In addition, it is stored in the linkage ratio storage area for storing the total cumulative ratio and the linkage ratio. Each of the combination ratio combination ratio storage areas for storing the ratios and the combination ratios of the 10 sets and the total cumulative number is composed of a counter of 1 byte at maximum. For example, in the case of storing the set ratio and the total ratio of 10 sets and the total cumulative number as an integer, the counter can be stored with a margin with a maximum of 1 byte. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates a base for 10 sets based on the number of game balls to be awarded to each winning opening for 10 sets, and calculates the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated based on the number of game balls won for each of the 10 sets of winning holes is stored in the base storage area. For example, when the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, they can be stored with a margin of a maximum counter of 1 byte.

  FIG. 9-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. The address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is assigned to a built-in ROM area which is a ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH among 0000H to 2FFFH; 2FC0H to 2FFFH is a program management area). Data is read from the ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. In this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas of the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to a built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers to the register via this built-in register area. Write the data. The address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to a built-in RAM area which is an RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. The CPU 103 designates this RWM area and reads data from the RAM 102. Data is written to the RAM 102. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  FIG. 9-15 shows an RWM area serving as a built-in RAM area. A built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area is configured by instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the control program to be executed (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

  Data used for displaying the connection ratio and the role ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative number of winning balls for each winning opening and a total cumulative combination ratio storage area. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (for 10 sets ) And a combined ratio storage area for 10 sets. It should be noted that the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area respectively store data having different subroutine start addresses. One byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the internal RAM area, and each data (command data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) has 1 byte. If the data exceeds the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. .

  FIG. 9-16 shows a display control example on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. On the display monitor 29, a plurality of items are sequentially displayed.

  FIG. 9-16 (A) is a time chart showing a display change mode on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed in green. When the display of display No1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. And if the display of display No6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No1 will be displayed. Thereafter, from the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term ratio of display No1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of display No2 to base 2 of display No5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 9-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term continuous ratio of display No1 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the characters “1.” are displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B2) shows a case where the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B3) shows a case where the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative continuous ratio is 58%, the characters “5.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B4) shows a case where the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the characters “0.” are displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B6) shows a case where the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

  The display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 30. Yes. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, the operation of the display changeover switch 30 is performed. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, The display of the total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “2”. When the set value is “2”, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “3”, and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, total cumulative displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E The display of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “3”. When the set value is “3”, the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “1”, and the short-term run ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative run ratio, and total cumulative are displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “1”.

  Note that the display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the connection ratio, role ratio, and base at each set value can be displayed. Only any two numerical values may be displayed. The connection ratio, role ratio, and base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, role ratio, and base are not limited to the form displayed on the display monitor 29. A history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the winning ratio and the base. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green. Short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio and total cumulative ratio are displayed in the same color, and base 1 and base 2 are the same as short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative ratio. You may display with a color.

  FIG. 9-17 shows an execution example of the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer. In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the total and total cumulative for 10 sets and the storage of the combined ratio storage area for storing the ratios and continuous ratios of the 10 sets and total cumulative are updated. At this time, the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer are moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are respectively set to the second storage area. The storage area is moved to the tenth storage area. For example, the number of winning balls of the general winning opening in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87” “66” “117” “45”, respectively. “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is “27”, “81”, “120”, respectively. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Accordingly, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted. When the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the number of prize balls stored may be temporarily deleted and a new number of prize balls may be stored. Or you may memorize | store a new number of prize balls in the form overwritten on the number of prize balls stored.

(Explanation of game control for other features)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. This main process only needs to be executed instead of the game control main process. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step Sa3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step Sa4), the RAM 102 is accessible. (Step Sa5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Subsequently, based on a clear signal that is an output signal of the clear switch AK001, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is on (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection process has been executed (step Sa7). When the power-off detection process is executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the head address of the backup setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa41), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). Thereby, the memory | storage content at the time of the power failure regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored.

  When power failure recovery is performed in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal that is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). If the lock switch 51 is on in step AKS001, the setting confirmation process is executed (step AKS002), and the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation process, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the lock switch AK002 is OFF in step AKS001, or after the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. If the lock switch AK002 is OFF in step AKS001, a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 182.

  When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation starts from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A command 9400H serving as a command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30, detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, etc. The symbol display 20 may be controlled so as to stop and display the off symbol or display corresponding to a game stop state different from the off symbol. When the execution of the setting confirmation process in step AKS001 ends, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state associated therewith are terminated, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done.

  If the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, if the power-off detection process is not executed in step Sa7, or if the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM clear The process is executed, and data other than the set value stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared (step Sa9). The storage area for storing information related to game winnings may not be cleared in step Sa9. Subsequent to step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa10), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). Thereby, the memory content regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized. If the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 and Sa10. Therefore, the clear switch AK001 detects an operation of pressing the switch ON. The operation related to the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

  When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined based on the lock switch signal whether or not the lock switch 51 is on (step Sa12). If the lock switch 51 is on in step Sa12, the setting value can be changed by executing the setting change process (step Sa13). In the setting change process, it is possible to check the change state of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying on the display monitor 29. When the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, or after executing the setting change process in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

  If the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The setting change process is not limited to the form in which the lock switch 51 is on, and the setting change process is executed on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable.

  When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as a change-permitted state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. Thus, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the game stopped state, as in the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 ends, the setting change state and the game stop state associated therewith are ended, and a command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done. In addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is on, it is set if the lock switch 51 is on when the power-off inspection process has not been executed or when the parity check execution result is not normal. It is not limited to the form in which the change process is executed, and the setting change process may be executed if the lock switch 51 is on only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is on.

  Thereafter, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read (step Sa14), and the value is used as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initialized by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). Also, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), display random number update processing (step Sa18), initial value random number update processing (step Sa19), and interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

  When executing the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process, the CPU 103, based on the display result determination table corresponding to the set value that has been set and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for the variable display result determination, It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the production symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Further, when executing the variation pattern setting process, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected by using a variation pattern determination table corresponding to a set value that has been set and numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. You just have to decide. As described above, the game can be progressed so that the advantage for the player is different by determining the change display result at a different ratio depending on the set value.

  In this embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6 of the main process, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. Although the setting value can be changed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage content of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the setting value can be changed. . That is, if the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined in step Sa12 whether the lock switch 51 is on. If it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11. If the stored content is initialized (cleared) and the lock switch 51 is on in step Sa12, a setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to You may make it progress to Sa11. For example, when a RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the stored content of the RAM 102 being initialized (cleared), the presentation control board 12 starts the initialization notification upon reception of the RAM clear notification command. Sometimes. For this reason, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed prior to step Sa13, when the setting change process is executed in step Sa13 and the setting value can be changed, initialization notification is executed and the setting is performed. There is a risk that the value change operation may be hindered. On the other hand, after the setting change process in step Sa13 is completed, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that the initialization notification or the like is started after the setting value change is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

  FIG. 9-19 shows the display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by a game attendant or the like when the connection ratio, role ratio, base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power supply is cut off when the power is cut off. When stopped, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (B), the display on the display monitor 29 ends. Thereafter, when an attendant of the game hall presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in −19 (C), the display monitor 29 displays the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a game hall clerk or the like while the setting value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. And display. For example, when a pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, it is updated to “2”, and if “2” is displayed, it is set to “3”. If “3” is displayed and updated to “1”, the display on the first display unit 29A may be updated cyclically and sequentially between “1” to “3”. Thereafter, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by an attendant of the game hall, the setting value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage) when the operation is detected. To do. At this time, the first display unit 29A is blinked to notify that a new set value has been stored so that an attendant of the game hall can recognize it.

  When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the setting value is changed, the hold storage based on the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is erased. When a switching operation to turn off the lock switch 51 is performed by an attendant at a game hall or the like, the setting change process is terminated when the operation is detected. The CPU 103 enters a state in which a game is possible by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to execute a lottery display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determining a variation pattern, a prize ball payout, and the like. In the setting change process, the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed. For example, the setting value that is most advantageous for the player is displayed. A predetermined setting value such as “1” or “3” which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player may be displayed.

  In the setting change process, the control for sequentially updating and displaying the numerical values displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to the form of updating every time a pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. For example, it may be sequentially updated and displayed each time a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected. For example, on the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed while the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A. 1 is updated to “2”, if “2” is displayed, it is updated to “3”, and if “3” is displayed, it is updated to “1”. It suffices if the display on the display unit 29A can be sequentially and sequentially updated between “1” and “3”. In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the stored contents of the RAM 102 can be used in common for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thereby, the increase in manufacturing cost by the increase in the apparatus structure in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented.

  FIG. 9-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation process in step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 9-20 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by a game attendant or the like when the connection ratio, role ratio, base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power supply is cut off when the power is cut off. When stopped, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (B), the display on the display monitor 29 ends. Thereafter, when a staff member of the game hall operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on without pressing the clear switch AK001, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in 9-20 (C), on the display monitor 29, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. In the state in which the set value is displayed, even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by an attendant of the game hall, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed. After that, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a game attendant or the like, the setting confirmation processing is ended because the operation is detected. The CPU 103 enters a state in which a game is possible by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to execute a lottery display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determining a variation pattern, a prize ball payout, and the like.

  As described above, the display monitor 29 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information related to the gaming value that allows confirmation of the adjustment of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The display monitor 29 can display information on set values for progressing the game so that the advantage for the player is different by changing the probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set value separately from the display device for displaying information relating to the gaming value, and thus it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 and the display of the connection ratio, role ratio, base, and the like. The display monitor 29 is used to display the connection ratio, the role ratio, the base, and the like, while the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used to display the set value. Also good. Thereby, it is possible to clearly separate the control for displaying the connection ratio, the role ratio, the base, and the like using the display monitor 29, and the control for displaying the set value using the setting display unit. Processing by a control program or the like can be distributed and simplified, and the control burden can be reduced. As described above, when a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be arranged on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display monitor 29 is arranged, or the display monitor 29 is arranged. The setting display unit may be arranged on a common substrate with the substrate.

(Explanation of modification regarding configuration and game control in other feature part)
FIGS. 9-21 have shown the display mode of the display monitor 29 in the modification which can perform a setting change process during a game. The setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the setting value may be changed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by an attendant of the game hall and the clear switch AK001 along with the switching operation to turn on the lock switch 51. When a pressing operation to turn on is performed, the display monitor 29 displays the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A by detecting those operations. If the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed down by a game hall clerk or the like in a state where the set value is displayed, it is displayed on the first display unit 29A each time the operation is detected. The numerical value is sequentially updated and displayed. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by an attendant of the game hall, the setting value displayed on the first display unit 29A is set as a new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 because the operation is detected. , Stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage).

  The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on based on detection of an operation for switching the lock switch 51 to ON and detection of an operation for pressing the clear switch AK001 to ON. However, it may be changed at power-on based on at least detection of an operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON. For example, even when the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on is not detected when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made changeable based on, for example, detecting the operation of restoring the stored content at the time of a power failure and then pressing the clear switch AK001 on. Thus, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the storage contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of power-on Control for changing the set value may be performed.

  When a new set value is stored, clearing the game control data holding area 150 allows a special figure hold memory, a general figure hold memory, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter. Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like may be deleted. As described above, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a change storage result that is a big hit with a change in the set value is generated, or a new normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Can be prevented from being released (the occurrence of a normal hit), and the fluctuation display result being executed can be unreasonably a big hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the big winning opening is closed during the big hit game, or the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open. It is possible to prevent the player from obtaining an inappropriate profit. Furthermore, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the pending storage from being erased even though the new setting value is not set. In addition, it is not limited to the form which clears a pending | holding memory | storage based on the new setting value having been set to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the setting value which was originally set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was reset. In some cases, the stored hold may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. Thereby, it can prevent reliably that the change of a setting value will not be correctly reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form in which the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening are closed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the set value is displayed, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103, the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening may be closed. Thereby, it can prevent reliably that the change of a setting value will not be correctly reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-22 shows a display mode in a modified example in which the display monitor 29 is not provided with the first display unit 29A capable of displaying the set value. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E, and the display ratio, role ratio, and base of the display on the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The setting value is not limited to the form displayed on the first display unit 29A, and a display unit for displaying the displayed connection ratio, role ratio, and base setting value may not be provided. In FIG. 9-22 (A), the display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E of the display monitor 29 displays the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base on the display unit 29E, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed on the display unit.

  FIG. 9-22 (B) shows an example of display control of the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base when the display unit for displaying the set value is not provided. In this case, the connection ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 1 are red, the connection ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 2 are green, and the connection ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 3 are blue. To display. By displaying the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base with different display colors depending on the setting value, it is possible to easily grasp the numerical value at which setting value. Also in this display control example, as in the above embodiment, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at the set value 1 can be switched and displayed every 5 seconds, and the set value 1 is changed every time the display changeover switch 30 is operated. Switch display at 5 second intervals for station ratio, role ratio and base to display for switch at 5 second intervals for set ratio 2, role ratio, base, and further, station ratio and role ratio at set value 3 What is necessary is just to be able to change cyclically to the switching display at intervals of 5 seconds of the base. Alternatively, the display ratio at the setting value 1, the connection ratio at the setting value 2, the switching display of the connection ratio at the setting value 3 at intervals of 5 seconds, the ratio at the setting value 1, the ratio at the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 The switching display of the ratio at intervals of 5 seconds, the base at the setting value 1, the base at the setting value 2, and the switching display at the base value of the setting value 3 at intervals of 5 seconds are cycled for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. Various changes may be possible.

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form that can display the combination ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for each set value, but the combination ratio, combination, and combination according to any one of the set values 1 to 3. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated for each of the setting values 1 to 3, and the highest or the lowest value among these calculated connection ratios, the role ratios, and the base, or the longest or the shortest measurement time. Only the value or the like may be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, among the calculated connection ratio, role ratio, and base, the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time is set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the initial display is changed by operating the display changeover switch 30. The display on the display monitor 29 may be switched to the value of.

  The display monitor 29 has two or more of the combination ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 1, and the combination ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 2. It is possible to calculate the ratio, role ratio, and base for each set value. In addition to or instead of the link ratio, role ratio, and base for each set value, the ratio, role ratio, and base for these two or more set values can be calculated. Display on the display monitor 29 may be possible. As described above, by allowing the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base at two or more set values, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be grasped in more detail. Note that the composite information is not limited to the form in which the combined ratio, the role ratio, and the base that are combined at two or more set values are calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29, but the combined ratio at two or more set values is not limited. Further, it is possible to calculate the role ratio and the average value of the base and display them on the display monitor 29.

  On the display monitor 29, only the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base according to the set value may be displayed. Further, the display monitor 29 displays the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base according to the set value that has been set as the initial display, and from the initial display to another set value according to the operation of the display changeover switch 30. The display may be switched to the display of the ratio, the role ratio, or the base. On the display monitor 29, as predetermined information according to the set value, a numerical value other than the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour) may be displayed.

  For example, under specific conditions such as immediately after a big hit game or during a short-time state, a special variation pattern determination table that is different from the normal variation pattern determination table is used to display a variation display with a specific variation pattern than normal ( For example, a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4)) may be easily executed. When the variation pattern can be determined using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is terminated and switched to the normal determination according to the set value. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the fifteenth variation display after the end of the big hit game, and 16 after the big hit game ends. After the first time, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table. When the set value is 2, the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the tenth fluctuation display after the big hit game ends. Is used to determine the variation pattern. After the 11th game after the big hit game is finished, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal variation pattern determination table, and when the set value is 3, the big hit game The fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern judgment table until the fifth fluctuation display after the end, and after the sixth hit after the big hit game, the fluctuation pattern at the normal time is determined. It may be determined variation pattern using the determination table.

  After initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 in step Sa9 in the main process or after the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special variation pattern is used in the first tenth variation. When the variable display is executed, it is suggested that a setting value (for example, setting value 1) advantageous to the player is set, and initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or a pachinko gaming machine When the change display is executed with a special change pattern at the 30th change after the set value set to 1 is changed, a set value (for example, set value 1) advantageous to the player is set. The game is made to pay attention to whether or not the fluctuation display is executed with a special fluctuation pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of fluctuation display. It may be. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such game characteristics, when the set value is 1, the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) or set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value is changed, the ratio of execution of the change with the special change pattern is the highest at the first tenth change, and when the set value is 3, initialization of the RAM 102 ( Since the (clear) is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the rate at which the change is executed with the special change pattern at the first tenth change is the lowest. In addition, only when the set value is 1, the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. After, it is sufficient to change at a special variation pattern in the first 30 variation eyes is executed.

  The switching condition for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern determination table to the normal fluctuation pattern determination table (the number of fluctuations until the table is switched) varies depending on the set value that has been set. You may determine by a ratio. The determination ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) is reduced due to different switching conditions for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the set value. Since the player can be watched at the timing, the effect of the variation pattern can be enhanced.

  A predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the fluctuation display is executed 100 times), each fluctuation pattern determination table in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of the specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the super reach fluctuation pattern) is normal is used. The variation pattern may be increased or decreased as compared with the case where the variation pattern is determined. In this case, even if the set value set is 1, 2 or 3, the execution of the change display of the change pattern of the super reach is determined at different determination ratios. Good. Thereby, after initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or Since the player can be focused on the number of times of variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variation display is executed, the effect of variation by the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach Can be increased. Furthermore, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are executed. For each set value, a variation pattern that can be determined only until it is set is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing the variation display by the variation pattern according to these set values is given to the player. Notification may be possible.

  A predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the fluctuation display of 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern other than super reach such as non-reach and normal reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Alternatively, a fluctuation pattern different from a normal fluctuation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, super reach, etc. according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the fluctuation time is extremely short such as 0.1) The determination ratios of the fluctuation pattern and the extremely long fluctuation pattern such as a fluctuation time of 10 minutes may be different.

  A predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, for a specific period until the variable display (100 times) is executed, a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at a rate at which a specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a setting value advantageous to the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the most advantageous setting value for the player), the high setting value suggesting effect is most easily executed, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the most disadvantageous setting value for the player). ), The high setting value suggestion effect may be made most difficult to execute. During the specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped The determination ratio of the variation pattern may be different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a probable state after the big hit game ends, and the game after the big hit game ends based on the fact that the game ball passes through the third count switch during the big hit game. The state may be controllable to a certain change state. In this case, the jackpot type that opens the second jackpot during the jackpot game, that is, the jackpot type that allows the game ball to pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game (hereinafter, jackpot X), A big hit type (hereinafter referred to as big hit Y) that does not allow the second big prize opening to be opened during the big hit game, that is, the game ball cannot pass the third count switch during the big hit game, is determined. May be varied depending on the set value. By doing in this way, since the ratio by which a game state is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game can be varied according to the set value that has been set, the gaming interest can be improved.

  In addition to or instead of the rate at which the fluctuation display result is a big hit or the decision rate of the big hit type is different, the number of winning balls when a game ball wins each winning mouth, or the big in each round during the big hit game You may make it vary the upper limit number of winning of a game ball to a winning opening according to the set value set up. Furthermore, the opening patterns of the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening during the big hit game may be made different according to the set value. Thereby, since the number of prize balls given in the big hit gaming state can be varied according to the set value, the gaming interest can be improved.

  A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the movable body effect can be executed by operating the movable body during a game such as during a variable display or a big hit game. When such a movable body is provided, variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of advance / retreat operation of the restricting member inside the second big prize opening can be performed, and the operation check of the movable body and the movable body are set to the initial position. When the movable body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 and a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1) When a new setting value is set to 1), the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. Thereby, a new set value can be accurately reflected on the operation of the regulating member and the movable body. The variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main process. For example, the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interruption occurs. If the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable prize initialization control may be started at a timing before the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started simultaneously, and the variable prize initialization control may be ended before the movable body initialization control. Thereby, the initialization control regarding the winning of a game ball can be appropriately performed.

  The determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern may be different depending on the set value. The specific variable display pattern may be a variation pattern different from the super reach variation pattern. The setting of which variation pattern is the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  9-23 and FIG. 9-24 show a modification in which the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are installed on the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless a game attendant opens the gaming machine frame 3. is there. In addition, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine 3 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is provided. You may enable it to prevent the unauthorized setting value change of the gaming machine 1.

  The security cover 500A is attached to the lower part of the right side of the outer frame 1a. As a result, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated by the security cover 500A approaching the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security cover 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, whereby the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the cover body is covered with a security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (pressing the cover body forward by the security cover 500A), it is more powerful to change illegal setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It may be possible to prevent it. When the setting switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover body or a security cover 500A instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 9-25 shows a modified example in which a security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is placed with the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 on the back. What is necessary is just to make it immovable from the state coat | covered from the side. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

  FIG. 9-26 shows a modified example in which the security cover is rotatably provided. Specifically, the left end portion of the security cover 500C may be pivotably supported with respect to a pivot that is provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3 and faces the vertical direction. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set to the lock switch 51. What is necessary is just to make it impossible to move from the state which has covered the changeover switch 52 from the back side. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot (not shown). When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500C instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

  When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main board 11, the security cover is made of a permeable resin material or the like so as not to hinder the visibility of the mounting surface of the main board 11 and the seal seal. Also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different game characteristics such as a probability variation loop type and a V probability variation type. In the case of the probability variation loop type or the V probability variation type, a function (so-called a small hit time) that can increase the number of possessed balls by a small hit with the first big prize opening as an opening target after the end of a specific big hit game. You may make it have. In the case of a gaming machine having a function of a small hit time, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state) Is set to 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is set to 1/30). , It is easier to enter the small hit time because the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, but the probability of big hit during probability variation control is also higher than when other set values are set Since it is also high, the small hit time tends to end. In other words, when a pachinko machine capable of executing probability variation control is equipped with a small hit time function, the higher the set value with a high big hit probability in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, but the smaller The hit time is less likely to continue, and the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, the lower the probability of hitting in the normal state. For this reason, in the probability variation loop type and V probability variation type pachinko gaming machines 1, not only can the range of games be expanded by installing a small hitting time function, but also a setting value with a low probability of big hitting is set. Even the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is present can cause the player to play the game.

  In the V-variable pachinko gaming machine 1, the long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the game ball is likely to win the large winning opening for determining the probability variation control) is used as the opening pattern of the probability variation control determining large winning opening in the probability variation control determination round. ) And short-term opening patterns (opening patterns in which game balls are difficult to win in the large winning opening for probability variation control), these long-term opening patterns and short-term opening patterns are set according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By determining at different ratios, the actual probability change probability (the ratio per probability change jackpot) may be made different.

  A big hit type determining gate is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, above the second big winning opening), and the game ball passes through the big hit type determining gate after a special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit. The random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination may be extracted at the timing, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted MR2 value may be started. When providing a jackpot type determination gate in this way, the jackpot type is determined at a different rate according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpots and 4 round jackpots are provided as jackpot types). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state of 16 rounds big hit is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be 3), the ratio of control to the big hit gaming state for 16 rounds of big hit may be the lowest).

  The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. Thus, when the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the hitting operation handle or hitting device. By providing in the vicinity, the glass door frame 3a may be made inoperable unless the glass door frame 3a is opened.

  What is determined at different ratios according to the set value is only when it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state. The variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. While determining whether or not to display the fluctuation display result as “big hit” or “small hit” at different ratios depending on the set value, the big hit type at a common ratio regardless of the set value In the case of determining the variation pattern, even if the setting value is changed, the determination ratio of the variation pattern is not changed, so that the player is not suggested or difficult to suggest the setting value. When determining not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern at different ratios according to the set value, the fluctuation pattern determination ratio will change when the setting value is changed. A set value can be suggested or easily suggested.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the operation of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 is performed by the CPU 103 executing the main process with the start of power supply upon power-on. Depending on the detection result, it is possible to control any of the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the initialization state, and the power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state in which a setting value change is permitted by operating the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001. The setting confirmation state is a state in which the set value can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. Unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, the initialization state is a state in which the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared). The power failure recovery state is a state in which the content stored in the RAM 102 is restored to the content at the time of the power failure.

  FIG. 9-27 shows an example of state control according to switch detection when the power is turned on. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. When executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized at step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002 of the main process. Control the confirmation status. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of a power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized at step Sa9 of the main process, so that the initialization state is established. Control. In this case, since it is determined in step Sa12 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting change process of step Sa13 is not executed. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure by the steps Sa41 and Sa42 of the main process. By doing so, the power failure recovery status is controlled. In this case, since it is determined in step AKS001 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting confirmation process in step AKS002 is not executed. As described above, in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as an on / off switching operation or a pressing operation by an attendant at the game hall. The state can be controlled according to the detection results.

(Explanation of the means related to the above characteristic part)
The above embodiment includes the following features. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value can be set, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, dedicated setting value display means for displaying the set setting value is provided to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that could not. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic part that solves this problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be played using a gaming medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process of Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value;
A game that gives a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first major winning opening, a second winning winning opening, etc.) A value providing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a process for releasing a big hit)
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information relating to the game value given by the game value giving means;
With
The information display unit can display the set value set by the setting unit (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
According to this means 1, there is no need to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value, so that an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be prevented. Can do.

As a gaming machine of means 2 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means can display predetermined information corresponding to a set value (for example, a portion on the display monitor 29 that can display a connection ratio, a role ratio, and a base).
The gaming machine described in the means 1 is described, and the means 2 makes it easy to grasp the state of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of means 3 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays a short-term continuous ratio, a short-term combined ratio, a total cumulative combined ratio, a total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 (Sequential display at 5 second intervals)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 is described, and this means 3 makes it easy to grasp predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 4 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, the set value 1 displays the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base in red, and the set value 2 displays the connection ratio, (Role and base are displayed in green, and with setting value 3, the ratio, role and base are displayed in blue, etc.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 or 3 is described, and the means 4 can easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 5 of the above characteristic part,
Operating means (for example, a display changeover switch 30),
The information display means can switch and display the predetermined information of each set value in accordance with the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 30, the connection ratio, role ratio, and base of the set value 1). The part to switch the display to the setting ratio 2 ratio, role ratio, and base display, and the setting value 2 ratio, role ratio, and base display to the setting value 3 ratio, role ratio, and base display Part to switch)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to means 4 is described, and this means 5 makes it easy to grasp predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 6 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion that can display only the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base according to the setting value that is set) Such)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to means 5 is described, and in this means 6, the confirmation operation of the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a gaming machine of means 7 of the above characteristic part,
Calculation means capable of calculating information relating to the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, the CPU 103 has a continuation ratio (%), a ratio (%), and a cumulative ratio (%), A portion for calculating a base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)) and a base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls Etc.)
The calculating means can calculate the information individually for each set value (for example, a general winning prize ball, a first start opening prize ball, a normal electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a prize ball total, The driving total is stored in a storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value that has been set, and can be calculated individually for each set value).
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to any one of the set values of the set values (for example, the connection ratio corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3). (Role that allows only the base and base to be displayed)
A gaming machine described in any one of means 1 to means 6 is described, and in this means 7, information confirmation work can be easily performed.

As a gaming machine of means 8 of the above characteristic part,
Calculation means capable of calculating information relating to the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, the CPU 103 has a continuation ratio (%), a ratio (%), and a cumulative ratio (%), A portion for calculating a base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)) and a base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls Etc.)
The calculating means can individually calculate the individual information that is the information corresponding to each setting value, and can calculate the composite information that is the information corresponding to two or more different setting values (for example, The combined ratio, role ratio, base calculation part etc.)
The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, a portion that can be displayed on the display monitor 29 by calculating a connection ratio, a role ratio, and a base at two or more set values).
The gaming machine described in any one of means 1 to means 7 is described, and according to this means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of production control for other features)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-described feature section. This effect control main process only needs to be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step AKS011) similar to that in the above embodiment, and then differs from the above embodiment in the power-on command process (step AKS012) is executed. After executing the power-on command process, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment, The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed to wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), command analysis processing (step AKS015), and production control process processing (Step AKS016) and effect random number update processing (Step AKS017) are sequentially executed.

  FIG. 9-29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step AKS012 as power-on command processing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 obtains an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 with the start of power supply as a received command, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9000H that is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If it is not a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9100H that is a setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not a setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9400H that is a setting check start command (step AKS024). If it is not a setting check start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and steps AKS021 to AKS024 are repeatedly executed and awaited until a reception command is acquired. In addition, when a predetermined error determination time elapses because the reception command cannot be acquired, it may be notified that an error of the reception command has occurred.

  If it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start process, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start process executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, settings other than the setting change end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. Thus, for example, various effects such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed as the game progresses. When a setting change start command is received, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state and are not in the game stop state are not executed. Or a limit as a limit.

  After the game stop state start process is executed in step AKS025, control for starting the setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and outputs the setting change notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. After the setting change notification control is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting change is finished (step AKS027). In step AKS027, if the command received from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH that is a setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is to be ended. If the setting change end command has not been received and the setting change is not completed (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  If it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), a control to end the setting change notification is performed (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the setting change notification control is thus completed, a game stop state end process is executed (step AKS029). In the game stop state end process, a setting may be made to enable command reception from the main board 11 that has been invalidated. Thereby, for example, the regulation may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Then, control which performs initialization alerting | reporting is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 in an initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the process may proceed to step AKS030 so that the initialization notification can be executed. In this way, it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to detection of an operation that is a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 with the start of power supply upon power-on.

  If it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start process executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, settings other than the setting confirmation end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. Thus, for example, various effects such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed as the game progresses. When the setting confirmation start command is received, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state and not in the game stop state are not executed. Or a limit as a limit.

  After the game stop state start process is executed in step AKS031, control for starting setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and outputs the setting confirmation notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. After the setting confirmation notification control is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is finished (step AKS033). In step AKS033, if the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H that is a setting check end command, it may be determined that the setting check is to be ended. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received and the setting confirmation is not terminated (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  If it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting check is to be ended (step AKS033; Yes), a control for ending the setting check notification is performed (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting confirmation notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, after the setting confirmation notification control is completed, the game stop state end process is executed (step AKS035). Thereby, for example, the regulation may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Then, you may perform control which performs a power failure recovery alert | report. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the power failure recovery notification screen on the effect display device 5 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure recovery notification, and outputs the power failure recovery notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure, in response to the case where the operation of depressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected with the start of power supply upon power-on. Good.

  FIG. 9-30 shows the priority of control regarding notification and screen display by effect control in the present embodiment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state with the start of power supply when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game stop state start process in step AKS025 or step AKS031 of the power-on command process. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is not executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities regarding the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 such as the power saving function setting screen is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen is displayed when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to make it possible to set the presence / absence and type, the current date and time by RTC, and the like. Since the priority AKP03 such as magnet error notification is lower than the priority AKP02 such as the power saving function setting screen, the priority AKP03 is lower than the priority AKP01 of setting change notification and setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Degree.

  As described above, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the setting screen of the power saving function etc., so that the control for starting the setting change notification is performed at step AKS026 of the power-on command processing. If the control is started or the setting confirmation notification is started in step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation ends. Even so, the display of the power saving function setting screen by switching the output amount changeover switch is not started. Thus, the display related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed with priority over the display related to the output amount or the output control of the effect such as the power saving function setting screen. Thereby, since the display regarding a set value is performed appropriately, it can prevent that the trouble in the change operation of a set value arises.

(Explanation of Modifications Related to Effect Control in Other Features)
FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed in the modification in which the setting check process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by an attendant or the like of the game hall, and a switching operation for turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 displays the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by an attendant at a game hall or the like, and is a display for confirming the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A command 9400H is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is finished, the setting confirmation state is finished, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modification, after performing the effect random number update process in step AKS017, the in-progress setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is executed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

  FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display monitor 29 is confirming the setting in which the set setting value is displayed so as to be confirmed (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed in the period after the control in step AKS058 is performed until the control in step AKS060 is performed. If the setting check is not in progress (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not a setting check start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, if a setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not a game is in progress in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step AKS053). In step AKS053, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it is determined that the game is not in progress during the period until the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received. In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

  If it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to the on state (step AKS054). The progress setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. If it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), or after the in-progress setting confirmation flag is turned on in step AKS054, the customer waiting transmitted from the main board 11 is awaited. It is determined whether or not a demo designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if there is no reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, when the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), after the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS057), control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed. (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058 to perform control for starting setting confirmation notification. Thereby, when the setting confirmation start command is received while the game is in progress, the setting confirmation notification can be started after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received.

  If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting is being confirmed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether a setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

  By executing such a setting confirmation process in progress, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game and the set value set is displayed on the display monitor 29, on the side of the effect control board 12, After receiving the customer waiting demonstration display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. Thereby, when the set value can be confirmed during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value can be prevented so that the effect during the execution is not stopped.

  When the setting check process is executed during the game on the main board 11 side, the setting check state may be controlled after the customer waiting demo designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Alternatively, instead of sending a setting confirmation start command together with a customer waiting demo designation command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is sent, and the set value is set after the progress of the game is finished. It is also possible to perform control in a state in which it is possible to confirm.

  Alternatively, the set value that has been set is displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not need to perform a display corresponding to the set value. Therefore, when the setting check process is executed during the game, a display on which the setting value can be checked on the display monitor 29 without transmitting a setting check start command or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is displayed. You may make it perform the control which starts. In this case, on the effect control board 12, control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game is continued.

  In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change end notification and the setting confirmation end notification may be executable. For example, in the power-on command process, the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028, the setting change end notification is started with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period is ended. The setting change end notification may be ended. In the power-on command process, the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034, the setting confirmation end notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation end notification period, and the setting confirmation end notification period ends. The setting confirmation end notification may be ended.

  In the setting change notification, control may be performed so that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification sound, or in place of part or all, a part or all of the light emitting members of the game effect lamp 9 or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed such that an arbitrary light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the light emitting device emits light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound, or in place of a part or all of the game effect lamp 9, a part of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed. Alternatively, control may be performed so that all light emitting members or arbitrary light emitting members such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification only needs to be able to notify that the set value can be changed using any effect device or a notification device different from the effect device. The setting confirmation notification only needs to be able to notify that the set value can be confirmed using an arbitrary rendering device or a notification device different from the rendering device. Note that the present invention is not limited to the form in which the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are performed, and one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may not be performed.

  It is not limited to the form in which the command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command and the 9401H serving as a setting check end command are prepared, and a common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting check end command. May be used. In this case, in the power-on command processing, in step AKS027, it is determined that the setting change is finished when the setting end command is received, and in step AKS033, the setting confirmation is finished when the setting end command is received. Then, it may be determined.

(Explanation regarding feature 71AK)
9-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK of the present embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in a board case that houses the effect control board 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch that can detect a predetermined operation such as a switch switching operation for initial setting of a predetermined effect output or the like. The production output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 only needs to include at least the volumes of the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the light emission amount of light emitting members, such as the game effect lamp 9, may be included. For example, when a game attendant opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated. Thus, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a condition that the initial setting of the effect output can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 3. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, whether to change or change the effect output by the player using the stick controller 31A or the like is switched. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating such an effect output setting as output setting information in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 9-33 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and the channel is set by rotating the knob 71AK002. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In this embodiment, the volume is initially set to one of six levels according to whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” to “F”, and the player adjusts the volume. Whether to allow or not is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or through a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120, thereby corresponding to the channel. The switch position can be specified.

  FIG. 9-34 shows initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “5”, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R depends on “volume 6 (maximum)”. The upper limit volume is initially set to “97.0”, and the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is controlled (allowed). It should be noted that the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited to the sound volume, and it is sufficient that the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 can be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of “6” to “F”, volume setting (adjustment) by the player is impossible (prohibited). Is executed. Further, in response to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, the effect display device 5 can display a setting screen such as a power saving function, the presence / absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode), and The RTC 126 can set (change) a value indicating the current date and time.

  As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is received by the knob 71AK002, and the operation of switching the switch position is detected. The production output amount can be controlled in any of a plurality of stages. The effect control CPU 120 executes a process for controlling the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages based on a switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  FIG. 9-35 shows an execution example of the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification regarding the feature portion 71AK. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (A), as a setting change notification, a setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . As setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (B), a setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (C), an initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and initialization notification sound 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic section 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process, as in the above embodiment. In the power-on command process, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028. Further, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034. Furthermore, by the control in step AKS030, the initialization notification is started with the start of the initialization notification period, and the initialization notification is ended with the end of the initialization notification period. Note that the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, and are part of the display area of the effect display device 5. It may be a mode displayed on the screen.

  The characteristic portion 71AK is configured to include an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform an initial setting of effect output such as sound volume as one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the sound output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the initial volume setting corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. What is necessary is just to output with a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 in which the message “setting change is in progress” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, a setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 in which a message “Setting confirmation is in progress” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 in which the message “initialized” is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

  In this way, an operation related to adjustment of the effect output is detected according to the operation of switching the switch position in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and the output amount of the effect is controlled to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection. In the setting change notification, which is a notification regarding the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output with the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. . Even in the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 may be output with the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. As described above, since the notification is performed based on the common output amount, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed in accordance with the change or confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clearing) of the storage contents in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 9-36 shows a display example when player volume adjustment, power saving function setting, and the like are performed with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK. For example, if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” and the player has not yet adjusted the production output, the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”. FIG. 9-36 (A) shows a player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes effect images showing six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and the display color of each memory is made different according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”, one memory is displayed in the first display color (for example, red), while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (for example, white). . At this time, the volume setting is changed to “volume 2” in response to the operation of tilting the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, and the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displays the first The display color memory is increased by one. As described above, each time a first operation of tilting the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (right direction or the like) is detected, a plurality of stages of production are performed until the production output setting reaches a maximum. What is necessary is just to change so that an output amount may be increased one step at a time. On the other hand, every time the second operation of tilting the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the output output amount in a plurality of stages is increased until the setting of the effect output reaches the minimum. What is necessary is just to change so that it may decrease one step at a time.

  When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. 9-36 (B) shows a power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting a power saving function and a display area for setting a value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence / absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode) according to the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the attendant of the game hall, etc. And the setting (change) of the value which shows the present date by RTC126 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 executes processing for setting (changing) the power saving function and the like based on the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 and the detection of the operation for changing each setting. For example, when “power saving mode A” is set to be displayed on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control to activate the power saving function is performed only when the demonstration screen display is in a waiting for a demo. Anything can be done. In addition, when it is set to select “power saving mode B” on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the luminance of the game effect lamp 9 is also displayed during the variable display in addition to during the customer waiting demonstration. Any control that activates the power saving function, such as reducing the (light emission amount), may be used.

  FIG. 9-37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK. This effect control main process only needs to be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step 71AKS011) and a power-on command process (step 71AKS012) as in the above embodiment. The initialization process at step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process at step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command process at step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power-on process at step AKS012 in the above embodiment. If it is. After executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process (step AKS013) is executed unlike the above embodiment. Thereafter, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014). If it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the processing of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. And wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 71AKS015), the command analysis process (step 71AKS016), and the effect control process process (Step 71 AKS 017) and the effect random number update process (Step 71 AKS 018) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main process of the characteristic section 71AK, the in-progress output change process (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

  FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step 71AKS013 as the start-time output switching process. In the start output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032). If the switch position is other than “F” (step 71AKS032; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS033), and the output at the start time The switching process is terminated. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating that the switch position corresponding to the channel can be specified may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control for starting setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so that the effect display unit 5 displays the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function. After the control for setting the power saving function or the like is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating “end” is confirmed on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting has not been completed (step 71 AKS 035; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71 AKS 036), and the process returns to step 71 AKS 035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A or the operation of pressing the push button 31B. Thus, control may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting has been completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS037), and the start-time output switching process is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores power saving function data indicating the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. In addition, when setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is performed, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

  FIG. 9-39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change processing. In the in-progress output change process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be set in advance as a condition for permitting adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during the execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the switching permission condition may be satisfied when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. When such a switch permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on the detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated in the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and the comparison result does not match. It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether the changed switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, when the switch position is other than “F” (step 71AKS054; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating that a switch position corresponding to a channel can be specified may be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control for starting setting of a power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same processing as that in Steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the start time output switching process may be executed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS057). If the setting is not completed (step 71AKS057; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to. Thereafter, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS058).

  If the switching permission condition is not satisfied at step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), the switch position is not changed at step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or the control is performed at step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After the determination, it is determined whether or not the player can adjust the volume or the like based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “0” to “5”, the player can set (adjust) the volume (allow). It may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If adjustment by the player is impossible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. In addition, it is not limited to what determines whether switching permission conditions were satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the detection of a switch position by step 71AKS052 may be performed without performing determination by step 71AKS051.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not an operation for changing the output amount of the effect has been detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, the detection of the operation for changing the stage output amount in a plurality of stages is performed based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. What is necessary is just to determine whether there was. If such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control is performed to adjust the output amount according to the detection result (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process is terminated. In step 71AKS062, when an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, update output setting data indicating the volume setting after the change is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. You can do it.

(Description of modification regarding characteristic portion 71AK)
FIG. 9-40 shows the priority of control regarding notification or screen display by effect control in the modification of the characteristic portion 71AK. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state along with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. On the other hand, when the setting check state is controlled with the start of power supply when the power is turned on, control may be performed so that the game is not stopped. Correspondingly, the production control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start process in step AKS031 of the power-on command process, and in the setting confirmation state, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is set. You may validate the input of the changeover switch signal which can specify a switch position. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 for setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 for the setting screen for the power saving function and the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the setting change notification priority AKP11, the power saving function setting screen, etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71 AKP 12 and further the setting confirmation notification priority AKP 13.

  As described above, the setting change notification priority 71AKP11 is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Therefore, when the control for starting the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing. Even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is changed to the specific position “F” before the setting change is completed, the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected. The display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, since the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like, when the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 of the power-on command processing. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is changed to the specific position “F” before the setting confirmation is completed, power saving is performed based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. As described above, when changing the set value, control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect is not executed, whereas when confirming the set value, control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may be executed. . Thus, when the set value changing operation is prevented from being hindered, the stage of the production output amount can be appropriately controlled together with the confirmation of the set value.

  By executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012 and executing the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect an operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state. Regardless, it is not limited to a mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not executed, but whether or not an operation for changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected in the command processing at power-on is determined. If it can be determined and the operation is detected, information indicating that the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is completed, the output amount of the effect is controlled based on the stored information You may do. For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has not been completed, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the result of specifying the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereafter, in step 71AKS031 of the start time output switching process, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the switch position specifying result. Also in this case, when the setting is changed, it is possible to limit the control of the output amount of the effect regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  Alternatively, when the setting is changed, it is determined whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a specific switch position, for example, whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”. For example, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority over the control for displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028 of the power-on command process, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 which has been given priority is also ended. It suffices if the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12.

  Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting an operation that a player performs a predetermined operation is provided, and the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. Also good. For example, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by a player is provided together with or instead of the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001, and the player's operation is detected by the setting value change switch. Based on the above, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed in the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001.

  As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 71AK, after the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command process, the game stop state start process is executed, for example, in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is not executed. In this case, the input of a changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated, so that the adjustment of the effect output according to the switch position and the display of the setting screen 71AKD12 of the power saving function, etc. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the control is changed to the setting change state that permits the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the production is performed regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the production output amount. Execution of the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is restricted (prohibited). Thereby, since the control for changing the set value is prioritized over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  The production control CPU 120 controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect is received by the knob 71AK002. Thereby, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the initial setting of the production output amount can be appropriately switched. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the effect control main process of the characteristic section 71AK, after executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, control for switching the initial setting of the effect output according to the switch position is performed at step 71AKS033, or control for setting the power saving function is performed at steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037. Thus, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply, if the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state is completed, control is performed to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Thereby, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the initial setting of the production output amount can be appropriately switched. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  When the setting change notification is made by the display screen of the effect display device 5 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is irrespective of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. It is output at the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, when the notification is made with the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is illegal to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered. Can also be prevented. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

(Explanation of means related to the feature 71AK)
As for the above-described feature portion 71AK, there is a conventional gaming machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player. Further, as a gaming machine capable of changing the setting related to the production, there is one described in, for example, JP-A-2015-29614. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2015-29614 do not take into account control when changing the production settings while changing a plurality of settings having different advantages. It was. For this reason, there is a risk that the operation for changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change-permitted state that permits a setting value change by the setting means with the start of power supply;
An effect adjustment detecting means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress of step 71AKS019) CPU 120 for effect control to be executed)
Limiting means for restricting execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, in step AKS012 as a power-on command process in step 71AKS012) in the change permission state Production control CPU 120 for executing the process),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since execution of control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production according to the progress of the game (for example, CPU 120 for production control);
An effect control board (for example, the effect control board 12) provided with the effect control means,
The effect control board further includes accepting means (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that accepts an operation that can be detected by the effect adjusting detection means.
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
If the output adjustment control means detects an operation by the effect adjustment detection means before the change permission state ends, the output amount control means performs an operation by the effect adjustment detection means after the change permission state ends. To the stage of the output amount of the production based on the detection of (for example, execution of the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013),
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the setting value while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Unlike the operation during the game by the player, it has an initialization detecting means (for example, clear switch AK001 etc.) capable of detecting the operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine,
When in the change-permitted state, the setting value by the setting unit can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detecting unit (for example, when the clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52) ),
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the setting value without separately providing a configuration for changing the setting value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Change notification means (for example, the effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for notifying the setting value change by the setting means,
The change notification means performs notification (for example, output of setting change notification sound 71AKE01) by a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means.
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered while preventing the setting value from being changed due to fraud.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 according to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Setting confirmation control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation processing of step AKS002) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means;
The output amount control means includes
When in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the production based on the detection of the operation by the production adjustment detection means (for example, the setting screen of the power saving function setting screen higher than the setting confirmation notification priority 71AKP13). Priority 71AKP12),
When in the change-permitted state, the stage of the output amount of the production based on the detection of the operation by the production adjustment detection means is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function etc. 71AKP11),
Any one of the means 1 to means 5 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the stage of the output amount of the production can be controlled together with the confirmation of the set value, while the stage of the output amount of the production is not controlled when the set value is changed. It is possible to prevent troubles from occurring.

(Explanation regarding feature 72AK)
FIG. 9-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops with the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After moving upward from the retreat position to the right and stopping at the advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the operation effect is returned to the retreat position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotation mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at this time with the combined closed state as the origin position. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. Thereby, after the 1st movable member advances to the display screen center part of the production | presentation display apparatus 5, it will be in the open state which the 1st-3rd division | segmentation piece will divide | segment by the motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced position. The slide mechanism of the first movable member has the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the first moveable member being at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5 as the origin position. It only needs to be able to slide between the position and the right position.

  The second movable member stops with the upper position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After descending from the retracted position and stopping at the advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect is returned to return to the retracted position again. The second movable member is lowered from the retracted position, which is the origin position, by the operation motor AK014 to the advanced position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation that simply reciprocates up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

  The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that allows the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between a closed state and an open state of the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that enables the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left position or the right position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that allows the second movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation that performs the same operation as a normal effect operation during the execution of an effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a malfunction occurs in the normal performance operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the normal production operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin position.

  When a long initial operation is performed as a power-on operation, first, as indicated by a solid arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. To the overlapping position on the front side of the center of the display screen in the effect display device 5 that is the advance position. Subsequently, as indicated by a broken-line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state of the origin position to the open state by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Thereafter, as indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as indicated by solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the sliding mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the right movable position by the driving force of the operation motor AK013 and then moved to the left movable position. After returning to the home position. Then, as indicated by a solid arrow 72AKM07, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the origin position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Thereafter, as indicated by broken arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retracted position) to the advanced position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014 and then returned to the origin position (retracted position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, an operation in which a part of the long initial operation is omitted may be performed. For example, among the operations indicated by arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control for executing the operations indicated by broken arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09 is performed. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operations indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 are necessary. Further, in the long initial operation, the operations of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the second movable member are performed so that the movement amount is larger than the movement indicated by the broken arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. It may be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the movement amount is smaller than the movement indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added according to the detection results by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, an operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state that is the origin position is indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM03. The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on. After that, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07. The motor AK021 is driven. The second movable member is moved as indicated by broken arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

  FIG. 9-42 shows a control pattern used for driving the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, an effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and an effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns of the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used for executing a short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute the long initial operation. The production operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first production executed as the game progresses, such as reach production, for example. The action B control pattern for effect 72AKP12 is a control pattern used for executing the operation of the movable member included in the second effect different from the first effect executed with the progress of the game, for example, the notice effect. . In addition, as a control pattern of a movable member, more control patterns may be prepared and a part of control pattern may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive content of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121 and control the operation of the movable member.

  FIG. 9-43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command process only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the command processing at the time of power-on of the characteristic portion 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a reception command from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). If it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005) to change the setting, as in the above embodiment. Control to start the notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 72AKS006, unlike the above embodiment, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform control for executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. It should be noted that, even in the period after step 72AKS008 and subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not the setting change is finished (step 72AKS008) as in the above-described embodiment. If the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and a standby is performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008; Yes), the control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 72AKS010).

  After executing the game stop state end process in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation that is the return operation when the setting change state is the change permission state. It is possible to prevent control. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. When the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is executed, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, the long initial which becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation which becomes the return operation Control to execute the operation can be performed. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by common processing using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Then, control which performs initialization alerting | reporting is performed (step 72AKS014). In addition, after performing control which performs initialization alerting | reporting, you may make it perform control which performs long initial operation | movement. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, control for executing initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. .

  If it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is a setting check start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS015) and the setting check is performed as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control is performed to execute a short initial operation (step 72AKS017). Control for executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the control in step 72AKS017 is executed and in a setting check state for checking the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be performed. It should be noted that, even in the period after step 72AKS018 and subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting check is to be ended as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). When the setting confirmation is not finished (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 72AKS018; Yes), the control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command process is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member is executed after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation that becomes the initial operation follows the short initial operation that becomes the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. It is possible not to perform the control for executing. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. When the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023 is executed, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of the power supply, the long initial which becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation which becomes the return operation Control to execute the operation can be performed. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in Step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by common processing using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of Modifications regarding Feature 72AK)
FIG. 9-44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed in the modification of the feature unit 72AK. In the power-on command process in this modified example, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), and then control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, and control for executing initialization notification is performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply upon power-on. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the control of executing the long initial operation as the initial operation can be performed following the short initial operation as the return operation. . In addition, even after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, and then a short circuit that becomes a return operation. Subsequent to the initial operation, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed. As described above, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command and after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010, the common control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. Then, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the power-on command process in this modified example, when it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020. Thereafter, control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), and then control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS034), and then the power-on command processing is terminated. If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command, the memory content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is restored to the memory content at the time of the power failure with the start of power supply upon power-on. . When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation can be performed following the short initial operation as the return operation. it can. In addition, after executing the game stop state end process in step 72AKS020, the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034. After the state is finished, it is possible to perform control to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. As described above, when it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery notification command and after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020, the common control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed. Then, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be performed in accordance with the initialization notification, or may be performed even if the initialization notification is not performed. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be performed in accordance with the power failure recovery notification, or may be performed without the power failure recovery notification. Further, after the start of the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the fact that the return operation condition is satisfied. After starting the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the fact that the initial operation condition is satisfied.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be executed. It is only necessary to be able to operate according to a predetermined operation mode in the production accompanying the progress of the game. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily specified according to the configuration of the movable member.

  As described above, in the power-on command process for the feature 72AK, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the control is changed to the setting change state permitting the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the change work of the set value is not hindered by the movable member. Can be prevented from occurring. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the power-on command processing of the feature section 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, so that the short initial operation is performed as a return operation. Subsequently, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is finished. If a long initial operation that is an initial operation is executed in the setting change state, execution of the setting change notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state is completed, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when in the setting confirmation state. Thus, in the setting change state as the change permission state, the long initial operation that is the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, and the setting value changing operation is not hindered. It is possible to prevent troubles in changing the value. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, control for executing the long initial operation is performed in step 72AKS011. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation as the initial operation. As a result, when the trouble of changing the set value is prevented, it is possible to prevent a useless operation of the movable member and reduce a control burden for operating the movable member. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the feature 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the control is performed in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032, thereby returning to the return operation. Control is performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation, following the short initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72AKS014 is performed to perform control for executing initialization notification. In this way, the stored information in the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply when the power is turned on, so that when initialization related to game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, an initialization notification is issued. When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Even when it is determined in step 72AKS008 to end the setting change, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation following the short initial operation that is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the operation of the movable member can be made common and the control burden for operating the movable member can be reduced. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command process for the feature 72AK, in step AKS017, a control to execute a short initial operation is performed. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. Thereafter, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended, in step 72AKS021, control for executing the long initial operation is performed. In this way, after the setting confirmation state is completed, control is performed to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation. If the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state is completed, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is established. Thereby, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the setting value can be easily confirmed by preventing the long initial operation as the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state. Like that. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic portion 72AK)
As for the above-described feature portion 72AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player has been disclosed in, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Moreover, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154 have not taken into consideration the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member compete. For this reason, there is a risk that the operation for changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be operated in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014), and the like.
A movable control means (for example, step) capable of executing at least control of return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member. A production control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012, and the like.
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when in the change permission state (for example, execution of step 72AKS007),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012, 72AKS013, etc.)
When in the change-permitted state, control to execute the initial operation is not performed following the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being performed when the change is permitted.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent useless operation by the movable member and to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic portion 72AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 72AKS014). Etc.)
The movable control means includes
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 associated with execution of step 72AKS014).
After completion of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden by making the operation of the movable member common, and to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 72AK,
Setting confirmation control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation processing of step AKS002) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means;
The movable control means includes
When in the setting confirmation state, control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017),
After completion of the setting confirmation state, control to execute the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to easily check the set value by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting check state, and to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

(Explanation regarding the feature 73AK)
FIG. 9-45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 73AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command process only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. Also in the feature portion 73AK, the operation content of the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be the same as that of the feature portion 72AK of the present embodiment. In the command process at power-on of the characteristic unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005) to change the setting as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 73 AKS 006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73 AKS 007). If the setting change is not finished (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 73 AKS 007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 73 AKS 007; Yes), the control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 73 AKS 008), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 73 AKS 009). Thus, in the power-on command processing of the feature 73AK, control is not performed to execute the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is the change permission state. .

  When it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes), or after the game stop state end process is executed in step 73AKS009, control to execute the short initial operation is performed. (Step 73AKS010), and then, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (Step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 is completed. When the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, the long initial operation that becomes the initial operation is performed following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply. Can be controlled. In addition, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply, it is possible to perform a control to execute a short initial operation that becomes a return operation after the setting change state ends. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply, after the setting change state is finished, the long initial that becomes the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control to execute the operation can be performed.

  Then, control which performs initialization alerting is performed (Step 73AKS012). In addition, after performing control which performs initialization alerting | reporting, you may be made to perform control which performs short initial operation or long initial operation. Or after performing control which performs short initial operation, you may be made to perform control which performs initialization information, and performs control which performs long initial operation after that.

  When it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is a setting check start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS013) and the setting check is performed as in the above embodiment. Control to start the notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, a control for executing a short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS015). Control in which the control in step 73AKS015 is executed to perform a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting check state for checking the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be performed. Even in the period after the step 73AKS016 and subsequent steps, the control in step 73AKS015 is continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control in step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to confirm the setting (step 73AKS016). If the setting check is not finished (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is to be terminated (step 73AKS016; Yes), the control for terminating the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing is terminated. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, a long initial operation, which is an initial operation of the movable member, is executed after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation that becomes the initial operation is performed after the short initial operation that becomes the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. It is possible not to perform the control for executing. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. When the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021 is executed, the long initial which becomes the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which becomes the return operation when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply. Control to execute the operation can be performed. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by common processing using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the feature portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the feature portion 72AK.

  FIG. 9-46 shows a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during the execution of the setting confirmation notification regarding the characteristic portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying a message “setting confirmation in progress” is displayed, and a history of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of set values may be stored cumulatively on the side of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the setting value history is stored in a predetermined area together with the RTC information in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122, so that the effect control board 12 May be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, the setting value history is stored in the backup area in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 together with the RTC information, and a setting confirmation start command is transmitted. In addition, by transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying a set value history from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the power supply is supplied on the effect control board 12 side. You may make it possible to specify with the start of.

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviated from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the setting value history is grasped. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the command processing at power-on of the feature 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that it is movable when it is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Control is performed to execute a short initial operation, which is a return operation for returning the member to the origin position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, a short initial operation that is a return operation is executed. A history of set values that can be displayed in 73 AKD01 can be easily grasped by an attendant at a game hall. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 In this case, the control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation is not performed. As described above, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed in the setting confirmation state, while the long initial that is the initial operation is executed. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the staff of the game hall can easily grasp the history of the setting values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable member from easily grasping the setting value history.

  Even when the setting is changed to the setting change state, a history of setting values may be displayed. In this case, it is only necessary to perform control to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting change state as the change permission state. Thus, when the setting value history can be displayed by controlling to the setting confirmation state with the start of power supply, a short initial operation that is a return operation is performed, and the setting value is set. It may be possible to easily grasp the history.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, in step 73AKS010, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command, the control to execute the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended. Thereby, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation that is the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that the change operation of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. Thus, it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be finished, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed to perform a control to execute a short initial operation as a return operation. In this way, since the control is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered. An operation for appropriately returning the member to the origin position becomes possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that a short initial operation that becomes a return operation is performed. Subsequently, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to perform control for executing initialization notification. In this way, the stored information in the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply when the power is turned on, so that when initialization related to game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, an initialization notification is issued. When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Even when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation that is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered, the operation of the movable member can be made common and the control burden for operating the movable member can be reduced. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a history of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command, control is performed to execute a short initial operation in step 73AKS015. In this way, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the setting value history, is being executed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation as the return operation. As a result, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command processing of the feature unit 73AK, when the command 9100H serving as the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. A command 9100H that is a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from a command 9000H that is a RAM clear notification command, a command 9200H that is a power failure recovery designation command, and a command 9400H that is a setting check start command. Thus, a command as information different from the case where the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted when the setting value change in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted to be changed in accordance with the start of power supply upon power-on. Is done. Thereby, when preventing the trouble of the setting value changing operation from occurring, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the effect. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of means related to the feature 73AK)
With respect to the above-described feature portion 73AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Moreover, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154 have not taken into consideration the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member compete. For this reason, there is a risk that the operation for changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member that can be operated in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014), and the like.
And at least movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012) capable of executing a return operation control for returning the movable member to the origin position,
The movable control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, when the change is permitted, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK characterized by the above may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately operate the movable member and prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature 73AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 73AKS012). Etc.)
The movable control means includes
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012).
After the change permission state is completed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 73AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden by making the operation of the movable member common, and to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic portion 73AK,
Setting display means (for example, the effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the setting value set by the setting means;
The setting display means can display a history of setting values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is being executed, and does not perform control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is executed, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and the setting value changing operation is hindered. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature 73AK,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production based on the information from the game control means (for example, the production control CPU 120 for executing the command analysis process of AKS015).
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the game control means transmits information (for example, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command) that is different from the case where the change permission state is not controlled. ,
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to the effect control means and to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

(Explanation regarding the feature 74AK)
FIGS. 9-47 has shown the structural example of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in order to perform a confirmation effect regarding the characteristic part 74AK of a present Example. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. The confirmation effect is controlled to be executable based on the establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic portion 74AK includes a confirmation sound output that outputs the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L, a confirmation sound output that outputs the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R, and the stick controller 31A. And confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operation lever (lever) in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00. For example, an initial value of the confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 can be set. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, and confirmation. First confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the drum sound from the right speaker 8R twice. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control confirmation vibration in which two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A are driven in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matched determination value are performed. By performing control using the effect control data 74AKD03, output of confirmation sound and confirmation vibration can be executed.

  Further, during execution of the confirmation effect, some or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, lighting of the light emitting member is started and output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L is completed, the output of the confirmation sound is started from the right speaker 8R. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R is completed, confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A is started. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A is finished, and the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect is finished. The confirmation effect satisfies the confirmation effect condition by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B within a predetermined confirmation acceptance period after power supply is started by turning on the power in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The execution is started. Any one of the confirmation sound output from the left speaker 8L, the confirmation sound output from the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A. When the control to execute is performed, the control to execute other effects is not performed. As described above, when any one of the confirmation sound output and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is executed, the control may be performed so that the other effects are not executed. In this way, by confirming sound output and confirmation vibration being executed at different timings, it is easy for a game attendant or the like to know whether or not an effect using each effect device can be executed normally. Can do.

  FIG. 9-48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 74AK. This effect control main process only needs to be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the feature 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then the timer interrupt flag is turned on. Is determined (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed to stand by. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), command analysis processing (step 74AKS015), and effect control process processing (Step 74AKS016) and the effect random number update process (Step 74AKS017) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

  FIG. 9-49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control processing. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not initialization notification is started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command process of the above embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. Thereafter, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is first performed, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and it may be determined that the initialization notification is started when the initialization notification start flag is on.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control for starting the confirmation reception period is performed (step 74AKS032). The confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification, and may end with the passage of a predetermined confirmation acceptance time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is a confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033). If the confirmation acceptance period is started in step 74AKS032 or if it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether variable display is started (step 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display is started by receiving the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control for stopping the confirmation reception period is performed (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. As described above, when the variable display is started during the confirmation reception period, the confirmation reception period is stopped so that the confirmation effect condition is not satisfied. By canceling the confirmation reception period with the start of variable display, it is possible to control the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect so that the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation has been detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). In addition, the timer value is determined to be determined by the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS036 that an operation has been detected and a setting for executing a confirmation effect is made, control for terminating the confirmation reception period may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when the elapsed time measurement by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). And when it determines with it being the start of variable display (step 74AKS041; Yes), control which stops a confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and a confirmation effect control process is complete | finished. In this way, when variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. The confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect process timer has timed out (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control for terminating the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the value matches the determination value (step 74AKS046; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  FIG. 9-50 is a timing chart and the like showing an example of confirmation effect control with respect to the feature portion 74AK. In FIG. 9-50 (A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, while the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, a case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. FIG. 9-50 (B) shows that the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected and the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected when power supply is started by turning on the power. The case where it is controlled to the setting change state is shown. FIG. 9-50 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the RAM clear notification command has been received at the timing 74 </ b> AKT <b> 02 when the setting change state is not controlled with the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74 </ b> AKT <b> 01. . In the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, control in step AKS030 is performed, and initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of feature 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation reception period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. The If an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 74AKT03 within the confirmation detection period, it is determined that a confirmation effect start operation has been detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. Steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 are started to execute the confirmation effect. When the control for executing the confirmation effect is started in this way, the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 are used to provide a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects. Staging is executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the confirmation effect is ended by performing the control in step 74AKS045.

  On the other hand, in the case where the setting change state is controlled in accordance with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT11, for example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the command processing at power-on in the above embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is a setting change start command, the game stop state start processing in step AKS025 is executed, and then the control in step AKS026 is performed. And the setting change notification is started. At this time, except for the case where the setting change end command is received, the control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and the control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is ended in step AKS027 of the power-on command processing, and thus following steps AKS028 and AKS029. In step AKS030, initialization notification is started.

  Thus, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at timing 74AKT13, the initialization notification is performed in step 74AKS031 in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the feature portion 74AK. The confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. Therefore, at the timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation reception period, it is determined that a confirmation effect start operation is detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. Steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 are started to execute the confirmation effect. When the control for executing the confirmation effect is started in this way, the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 are used to provide a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects. Staging is executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the confirmation effect ends by performing the control in step 74AKS045.

  The effect included in the confirmation effect may be an effect using any effect device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. It may be possible to execute.

  As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, after executing the power-on command process in step 74AKS012, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command process, the game stop state start process is executed, for example, in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is not executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, in step AKS030, control for executing initialization notification is performed. Thereafter, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the determination that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and subsequent steps. Perform control to be executed. Thus, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the control is changed to the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. Thereby, since the control for changing the setting value is prioritized over the control for executing the confirmation effect, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the power-on command process, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. Thereafter, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Do. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. In the confirmation effect control process of the feature part 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed to enter a confirmation acceptance period. After that, it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation is detected, and the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. . As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  When the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state by executing the control in step 74AKS032. ), The confirmation confirmation period is the same as when the setting confirmation state is completed. Control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied in the confirmation reception period. Thereby, when preventing trouble in the setting value changing operation, it is possible to share control for execution of the confirmation effect and reduce the control burden of the confirmation effect. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the feature part 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling the control to output the confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, the confirmation effect includes output of confirmation sound by the speakers 8L and 8R serving as sound output means. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Accordingly, the setting value can be appropriately set.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic portion 74AK)
With respect to the above-described feature portion 74AK, there is a conventional gaming machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect conflict. For this reason, there is a risk that the operation for changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Production means capable of performing production (eg, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.)
Confirmation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018) capable of executing confirmation effect control by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after power supply is started; With
The confirmation control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS021 and AKS030) ),
When in the change permission state, control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 relating to the characteristic part 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect in response to establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030) ),
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic part 74AK,
Provided with a game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player,
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036).
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the characteristic part 74AK,
The confirmation control means, when initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the confirmation effect condition in the common confirmation reception period when the change permission state ends. Control to execute the confirmation effect according to establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
Any one of the means 1 to the means 3 related to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the execution of the confirmation effect can be made common to prevent troubles in changing the setting value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic part 74AK,
Provided with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting production sound,
The confirmation effect includes an output of confirmation sound by the sound output means (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02).
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

(Explanation regarding feature 75AK)
FIG. 9-51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic portion 75AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command process only needs to be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main process in the feature 74AK of the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the characteristic portion 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). If it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 75AKS005) to change the setting, as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). When the setting change is not finished (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above-described embodiment, the confirmation effect control process during the setting change is executed (step 75AKS008), and the process returns to step 75AKS007. As described above, in the power-on command process of the characteristic portion 75AK, the setting change confirmation state control process is executed in step 75AKS008, whereby the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of power supply. Control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. If it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 75AKS007; Yes), the control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 75AKS010).

  When it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes) or after the game stop state end process is executed in step 75AKS010, control to execute initialization notification is performed. (Step 75AKS011), the power-on command processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), the processing corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016) as in the above embodiment. ), Power-on command processing is terminated. As described above, in the power-on command process of the characteristic unit 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of power supply, the setting change confirmation confirmation effect control process of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting confirmation state is entered. When controlled, the process corresponding to the confirmation effect control process during the setting change is not executed. Therefore, control is performed so that the confirmation effect can be executed when in the setting change state, while control for enabling the confirmation effect is not performed when in the setting confirmation state.

  FIG. 9-52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step 75AKS008 as the confirmation effect control processing during setting change. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the on state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the setting effect changing confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 75AKS033). If no operation is detected in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the confirmation effect control process during setting change is terminated. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that an operation has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), an effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read as a setting for starting execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer initial stage is set. The value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). In this way, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change, the determination of step 75AKS033 is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state as the change permission state is set, an arbitrary period such as a confirmation reception period is not provided. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether or not a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control for terminating the confirmation effect is performed (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that a timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS040 that the determination value is met (step 75AKS040; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

  FIG. 9-53 is a timing diagram illustrating an example of confirmation effect control with respect to the characteristic portion 75AK. In FIG. 9-53 (A), when power supply is started by turning on the power, there is a detection of an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001, while there is no detection of an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. Correspondingly, a case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. FIG. 9-53 (B) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, there is a detection of an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 and a detection of an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The case where it is controlled to the setting change state is shown. FIG. 9-53 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

  When the power supply is started by turning on the power at timing 75AKT01, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is the same as the case where the feature 74AK does not control the setting change state, and the RAM clear notification command is received at timing 74AKT02. As a result, the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation reception period is started accordingly. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at timing 75AKT03 within the confirmation reception period, control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, etc. A plurality of types of effects serving as the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the power supply is started by turning on the power at timing 75AKT11, the setting is changed at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the setting is changed to the setting change state in the feature 74AK. By receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is a setting change start command. Thereby, following step 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether setting change is complete | finished in step 75AKS007, but when not complete | finishing at this time, the confirmation effect control process during setting change is performed in step 75AKS008. The In the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, if it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not being performed, it is determined whether or not a start operation is detected in step 75AKS033. Thus, the confirmation effect condition can be established by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B in the setting change state as the change permission state. For example, when an operation of depressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that a confirmation effect start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change. Then, control for executing the confirmation effect is started, such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change. Thus, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects serving as the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

  When the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at timing 75AKT15 after timing 75AKT14 is reached, it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is completed in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK. Thus, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and initialization notification is started. When this initialization notification is started, as in the case of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. That's fine. And when the start operation | movement of a confirmation effect is detected in this confirmation reception period, the control which performs a confirmation effect should just be started again.

  As described above, the power-on command process of the feature 75AK includes the setting change confirmation effect control process executed in step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control process. If it is determined that there is a confirmation effect, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and subsequent steps to execute the confirmation effect. In this way, when the power supply is turned on when the power is turned on, when the control is changed to the setting change state that permits the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the control is performed to execute the confirmation effect based on the confirmation effect condition being satisfied. Therefore, by making it possible to execute a confirmation effect when it is in the setting change state as the change permission state, it is possible to confirm the state of the gaming machine accurately and to hinder the work of checking the state of the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

  In the command process at power-on of the feature portion 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the confirmation effect control processing similar to that of the feature portion 74AK is executed, thereby confirming acceptance. The period starts. In the confirmation acceptance period, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected without providing a confirmation reception period. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting change state as the change permission condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the operation for confirming the state of the gaming machine is prevented from being hindered, the confirmation effect is performed together with the change of the setting value. It can be done properly.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. Then, the confirmation reception period is started by executing the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the feature portion 74AK. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied in the confirmation reception period, thereby causing trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine. When this is prevented, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

   The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected. In addition, when the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the feature portion 74AK is executed, it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation has been detected, whereby the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Thereby, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed in the case of preventing troubles in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine.

(Explanation of means related to the characteristic part 75AK)
With respect to the above characteristic portion 75AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player has been disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect conflict. For this reason, there is a possibility that the work for checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic part 75AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing troubles in checking the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the player's advantage differs based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Production means capable of performing production (eg, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.)
Confirmation control means (for example, confirmation effect control processing in step 74AKS018, confirmation effect control during setting change in step 75AKS008) capable of executing confirmation effect control by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after power supply is started. Production control CPU 120 for executing the process),
The confirmation control means includes
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied in the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, etc.) ),
When in the change-permitted state, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of a confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be executed in the change-permitted state, it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and prevent troubles in checking the state of the gaming machine. .

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means includes
When initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the confirmation effect condition being satisfied in the confirmation reception period (for example, step 74AKS033). 74AKS036 execution, etc.)
When in the change-permitted state, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in response to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect together with the change of the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect in response to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period after the change permission state ends (for example, steps after executing Steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). 74AKS018 execution, etc.)
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles from occurring in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 75AK,
Provided with a game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player,
The confirmation effect condition is established based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The game machine may be any one of the means 1 to the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent troubles from occurring in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

(Explanation of means common to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK)
As a gaming machine of means A relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
A setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, clear switch AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine,
A setting confirmation control means that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection means with the start of power supply (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS001 and AKS002);
Change permission control means that can be controlled to the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means with the start of power supply (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa13).
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the setting value can be appropriately set by appropriately controlling the setting confirmation state and the change permission state.

As a gaming machine of means B according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
A setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, clear switch AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization,
When an operation is not detected by the setting detection unit with the start of power supply and an operation is detected by the initialization detection unit, an initialization notification is executed together with the start of power supply, while power supply start Accordingly, when an operation is detected by the setting detection means, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification after the operation is not detected (for example, for effect control for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012) CPU 120 etc.)
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value by appropriately executing the initialization notification.

As a gaming machine of means C relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Comprising information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information relating to a game value given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area;
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A).
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the set value without separately providing a configuration for displaying the set value.

As a gaming machine of means D according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
An effect detection means (for example, an output amount changeover switch 71AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to the output amount of the effect;
Display control means for displaying the display related to the set value by the setting means in preference to the display related to the output amount of the effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing step AKS026);
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of means E according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on information from the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the command analysis process of AKS015),
The effect control means is an information restriction means for restricting control based on information different from the notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state when in the change permission state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing AKS027, etc. )
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and to appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation for associating feature parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 98AK, and 99AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other characteristic portions. About the characteristic part combined in this way, or the individual characteristic part which is not combined, you may combine suitably a part or all of each structure regarding another characteristic part. For example, with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK, the configuration of the production control CPU 120 that executes the output switching process at start time in step 71AKS013 of the production control main processing, and the short initial operation at step 72AK007 of the power-on command processing with respect to the characteristic portion 72AK. With regard to the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs the control to be executed and the characteristic portion 73AK, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing that the setting change is finished. With regard to the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic portion 74AK, in step 74AKS008 of the power-on command process regarding the configuration and the characteristic portion 75AK of the CPU 120 for effect control that executes the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process. With regard to the configuration and feature part 98AK of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process during the fixed change, with respect to the configuration and feature part 99AK of the effect control CPU 120 that sets the air volume corresponding to the volume in the process of step 98AKS003, step 99AKS003 and A configuration in which different determinations are executed in Steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015 may be a combination of some or all as appropriate.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 51 ... Lock switch 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU
AK001 ... Clear switch 71AK001 ... Output amount changeover switch 72AKP01 ... Short initial control pattern 72AKP02 ... Long initial control pattern 74AKP01 ... Production control pattern 98AK001 ... First air outlet 98AK002 ... Second air outlet 99AK001 ... First movable body 99AK002 ... Second movable body 99AK002 body

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A first effect movable body provided so that a player can contact;
A second effect movable body provided so that the player can contact;
An operation control means for controlling operations of the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body;
The operation control means includes
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the first effect movable body,
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the second effect movable body,
The game machine characterized in that the operation is stopped under different conditions between the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body.

Images